JP7366642B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a technique has been proposed that allows text information of a character's dialogue to be displayed in different formats during execution of a super reach effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-77592 Publication

According to the technology described in Patent Document 1, when displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, there are problems such as an increase in the control burden for displaying the moving image or difficulty in recognizing the character image. This may cause problems in display control.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that enables appropriate display control .

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention:
A gaming machine capable of executing games,
a production execution means capable of executing a specific production of displaying a moving image with a text image added;
a first storage area that stores data related to moving images;
a second storage area that stores data related to character images;
a third storage area that stores data regarding a character image different from the character image;
moving image control means for controlling display of moving images using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using data in the second storage area;
character image control means for controlling display of a character image using data in the third storage area,
The data in the second storage area includes data regarding a plurality of character image constituent elements including text information data and text display setting information data ,
The data in the third storage area includes data regarding a plurality of character image constituent elements including character information data and character display setting information data,
The character image control means is capable of changing the text information data and the text display setting information data during a display period of a character image added to one moving image,
The performance execution means executes, as the specific performance, a first specific performance corresponding to a case where the player is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and a second specific performance corresponding to a case where the player is not controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible and
The moving image control means is capable of controlling the display of the moving image using different data in the first storage area for the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
There is a character image data table constituted by data regarding a plurality of character image constituent elements in the second storage area,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the first specific effect includes a first character image data table and a second character image data table different from the first character image data table. ,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the second specific effect includes the first character image data table and the second character image data table,
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher when a character image is displayed using the second character image data table than when a character image is displayed using the first character image data table. is high,
There is a character image data table configured of data regarding a plurality of character image constituent elements in the third storage area,
The text information data includes first text information data, second text information data, and third text information data,
The text display setting information data includes first text display setting information data, second text display setting information data, and third text display setting information data,
The first character image data table includes first data for displaying a character image using the first text information data and the first text display setting information data , and the second text information data and the second text display. and second data for displaying a character image using the setting information data ,
The second character image data table is configured to include the first data and third data for displaying a character image using the third text information data and the third text display setting information data ,
The character image data table includes character data for displaying a character image using the character information data and the character display setting information data,
The first text display setting information data, the second text display setting information data, and the third text display setting information data each include text display color data regarding a display color, text display position data regarding a display position, including;
The character display setting information data includes character display color data regarding display colors and character display position data regarding display positions,
The text display color data and the character display color data have a common data format,
The text display position data and the character display position data have a common data format;
According to such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.
(1) The other gaming machine is a gaming machine that can be set to one of multiple types of setting values that have different advantages for the player (for example, one of multiple types of setting values that have different jackpot winning probabilities). a pachinko game machine 1 etc. that can be set to CPU 103 of the main board 11 that transmits commands), an effect control means that controls the execution of the effect based on commands transmitted from the game control means (for example, based on an effect control command transmitted from the CPU 103, A performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12 that controls the execution of the performance), a display means provided on the same board as the game control means (for example, a display monitor 21TM029 etc. provided on the same main board 11 as the CPU 103), , the game control means controls the progress of the game based on continuous values corresponding to a plurality of types of setting values (for example, the CPU 103 corresponds to a plurality of types of selectable setting values and controlling the progress of the game based on continuous values), a first command that can specify the number of types of setting values, and a second command that can specify the value corresponding to the set value. (For example, the CPU 103 sends a selectable setting command that can specify the number of types of selectable setting values, and a setting command that can specify the value corresponding to the set setting value. ), and a value that corresponds to multiple types of setting values and is different from continuous values can be displayed on the display means (the CPU 103 can display a value that corresponds to multiple types of setting values and is different from continuous values). , the display monitor 21TM029 should be able to display a value that is easy for the staff at the game parlor to recognize), and the effect control means may display the set value that is set based on the first command and the second command. (for example, the production control CPU 120 specifies the set setting values based on the selectable setting command and the setting command), and further displays the moving image to which the character image is added. A specific performance execution means (for example, a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) that can execute a specific performance (for example, a SP reach A or SP reach B reach performance, etc.), and a first storage area (for example, a storage area) that stores data related to moving images. area 91AKM11, etc.), a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13, etc.) that stores data related to character images, and a moving image control means (for example, video a decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) and a character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) that controls the display of character images using data in the second storage area, The data in the second storage area includes a plurality of components including a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information, etc.) and a second component (for example, a display style set by text display setting information, etc.). The character image control means includes data regarding character image components, and the character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image (for example, as shown in FIG. -7).

According to such a configuration, the performance control means can be made to recognize the current setting value regardless of the type of selectable setting value without compressing the capacity of the game control means. Moreover, a suitable value can be displayed as a set value on a display means provided on the same board as the game control means. Furthermore, appropriate display control becomes possible.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the performance control means can control the execution of the performance based on values that correspond to a plurality of types of setting values and are not continuous (for example, the performance control CPU 120 , the execution of the effect can be controlled based on values that correspond to a plurality of types of setting values and are not continuous, etc.).

According to such a configuration, a suitable value can be reflected in the performance as a set value.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the gaming control means transmits the first command together with the power-on command when power supply to the gaming machine is started or restarted (for example, The CPU 103 may transmit a selectable setting command together with an initialization command when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started or restarted.

According to such a configuration, the production control means can be made to recognize the current set value without using a power-on command.

(4) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (1) to (3) above, if the effect control means cannot specify the set value, the set value is advantageous to the player. (For example, if the production control CPU 120 cannot identify the set value, the set value is the set value with the lowest probability of winning the jackpot.) 1).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent processing from being performed assuming that a setting value that is more advantageous than the currently set setting value is set.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the performance control means is capable of executing a suggestive performance that suggests the set value (for example, the performance control CPU 120 When the number of selectable setting values is small, the number of selectable setting values is larger than when the number of selectable setting values is large. The effect control CPU 120 executes a suggestive effect in a manner in which it is difficult to specify which setting value is selected (for example, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the effect control CPU 120 (For example, it may be made difficult to specify which setting value is set by lowering the execution rate of the special mode preview effect than when there are many.

According to such a configuration, suitable suggestion effects can be executed according to the number of selectable setting values.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, the performance control means is capable of backing up information regarding setting values (for example, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of backing up information regarding setting values). (e.g. storing information on the received production control commands including the and setting commands in the received command log area, and storing information on the current setting value recognized as the set setting value in the setting value log area, etc.) (For example, the production control CPU 120 treats the information stored in the received command log area as the backup target for some applications, and the information stored in the setting value log area for other applications.) (e.g., the information stored in the database may be treated as a backup target).

According to such a configuration, information regarding setting values can be suitably utilized depending on the purpose.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to gaming machines as described in (7) to (14) below. BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, there have been gaming machines that are capable of displaying text information of characters' lines in different ways during execution of a super reach effect, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-77592. In such gaming machines, when displaying moving images with text images added, there are problems with the display, such as an increase in the control burden for displaying the moving images or difficulty in recognizing the text images. In view of this, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that enables appropriate display control.

The gaming machine (7) is a gaming machine that can execute games (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.), and is a specific production that displays a moving image with a character image (for example, SP Reach A or SP Reach B). a first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11, etc.) that stores data related to moving images; and a first storage area (such as storage area 91AKM11) that stores data related to character images. a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13, etc.), a moving image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) that controls the display of moving images using the data in the first storage area; character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) that controls the display of character images using the data in the second storage area; For example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, a display style set by text display setting information, etc.). The control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of a character image added to one moving image (see, for example, FIG. 18-7).
According to such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(8) In the gaming machine according to (7) above, when displaying a character image corresponding to a common first component during the display period, the character image control means displays a second component related to the common character image. It may be changeable (see, eg, FIG. 18-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(9) In the gaming machine of (7) or (8) above, the character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image (for example, field data constituting a color field, etc.) to The second component related to the character image may be changeable (see, for example, FIG. 18-6).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (9) above, the character image control means may control a specific character image (for example, a text image indicating "super hot") corresponding to a specific first component group. ), and the second component related to the specific character image may be changeable at a plurality of timings (for example, see FIG. 18-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (10) above, the character image control means can individually change and display a first component and a second component regarding the character image. (See, for example, Figure 18-4).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (11) above, the data in the second storage area may include outline data (for example, outline font data) that can be used to display character images.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(13) In any of the gaming machines described in (7) to (12) above, when a specific element is set as a character image component (for example, when the color field is "gold"), a glossy character In addition to displaying the image, it may also be possible to add and display an effect image around the character image (for example, see FIG. 18-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(14) In any of the gaming machines described in (7) to (13) above, when a special element is set as a character image component (for example, when the color field is "rainbow"), a predetermined range (for example, a character It is possible to display character images in which multiple display colors change sequentially (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, blue-purple, and red-purple) depending on internal coordinates, display time range, etc. You can.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of accessory control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram showing the output period of a security signal. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting change flag is set when the power is turned on. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power outage occurs before the set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power outage occurs after the set value is determined. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the configuration of the special variable winning ball device in the characteristic part 052IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 052IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a small hit fluctuation pattern table. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a special variable winning ball device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows accessory control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart showing processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state changes. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric accessory release pre-processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of over-winning. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a suggestion performance determination table when over-winning. It is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect processing when winning a small hit. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a suggestion production determination table when winning a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows prize pitch number display suggestion production processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table. It is a flowchart which shows prize pitch number emphasis production processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a prize pitch number emphasizing effect determination table. 12 is a flowchart showing variable display start waiting processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a setting value suggestion performance determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows ending effect processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a performance mode of a setting value suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the performance aspect of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of right-handed hitting information. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the over-winning suggestion performance, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggestion production. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the over-winning suggestion performance, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggestion production. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 1. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 2. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 3. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of suggestion performance processing when waiting to pass through a gate. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the suggestion performance determination table when waiting to pass through a gate. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the suggestion performance determination table when waiting to pass through a gate. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation operation of a suggestion presentation while waiting to pass through a gate. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of various suggestion effect determination tables. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting value display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value determination table for a display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting value update processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting command transmission process. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the production control command. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting value information storage area. It is a figure showing an example of a notice mode decision table and a special mode pattern decision table. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen during maintenance mode. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a figure showing the numerical value range corresponding to the 1st special figure. It is a figure showing the numerical value range corresponding to the 1st special figure. It is a figure showing the numerical value range corresponding to the 2nd special figure. It is a figure showing the numerical value range corresponding to the 2nd special figure. It is a flowchart showing an example of processing within the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of variable display start setting processing concerning feature part 60AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation effect determination processing concerning feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the presence/absence of the operation performance regarding the characteristic part 60AK, and the number of times. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining the number of setting suggestions related to the feature section 60AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the setting suggestion pattern based on characteristic part 60AK. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining a setting suggestion pattern related to the feature section 60AK. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the frequency|count of value notification based on characteristic part 60AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display regarding the characteristic part 60AK. It is a diagram showing execution periods and execution timings of various effects related to the feature section 60AK. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the operation performance regarding the characteristic part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the operation performance regarding the characteristic part 60AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control board concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the storage area concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining moving image data and text display process tables related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display process table regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of text display control regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display setting information regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right strike indicator 26 is provided to encourage a right strike operation in which a firing operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and its lighting is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this example, a first hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and a second hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. Note that a display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to display an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification LED 37 is provided to encourage a right-handed hitting operation. In addition, the lighting of the right hit notification LED 37 is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided below the image display device 5. The game ball that has entered the first starting prize opening is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

In addition, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting prize opening, and is configured to prevent game balls flowing down from the right side of the gaming area from entering the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 that prevents game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, it is possible to fire the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed shooting). The game ball is configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting prize opening only when the player performs the following operation.

In addition, this example shows a case in which the row of nails 19 is provided so that the game ball can be won in the first starting prize opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, but such a mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, the first starting winning hole may be provided on the left side of the gaming area so that a game ball can be won in the first starting winning hole only when a left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning hole may be configured such that a game ball can be won in the first starting winning hole. The opening may be provided on the left side of the gaming area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when a left-handed operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

A special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the passage gate 41. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 extends in the left and right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member, which is formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game balls flow down, in the front and rear directions, thereby changing the bottom surface. A large prize opening located at the lower part of the member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in a jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Opening control is executed in which the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward toward the player, and the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is brought into the open state.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 that forms a special winning hole for small winnings, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole. As shown in , the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to it on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left and right direction in a slightly inclined state, and extend in the front and back direction with a plate-shaped bottom member that is formed as the bottom of the channel through which the game ball flows down. By moving forward and backward, the special winning hole and the second start winning hole located below the bottom member can be put into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize, and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. ). The special variable winning ball device 17 controls the bottom member in a small winning game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small winning pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Opening control is executed in which the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward, and the special winning opening, which becomes the winning area, is opened. In addition, when the variable winning ball device 6B hits the normal symbol display 20 and a symbol is derived and displayed, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, Opening control is executed to open the second start-up winning opening, which becomes the winning area.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so the game balls that fall onto the special variable winning ball device 7 If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B below.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. If the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are in the closed state, the game balls on the winning ball device 6B move from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged next to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win and the variable winning ball device 6B does not win. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting prize opening is in the open state, the game ball that has fallen into the second starting prize opening will enter the second starting prize opening and become the special variable winning ball. Game balls do not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning hole is in an open state, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning a prize opening is not also in an open state, the game ball will move on the bottom member of the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 and fall as it is toward the out opening.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a plurality of regulating pieces that reduce the speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. There is. In this example, the regulation piece is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B, so that the game flows downward from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanderes with a movement in the front-back direction component, and the time taken for the ball to flow down is delayed compared to when there is no regulating piece.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is placed on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is placed on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device starts from the variable winning ball device 6B. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward the player 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the grand prize opening is provided in the grand prize opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is in the open state, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to close and the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the grand prize opening and obtain a prize ball, so it is difficult for the player to be in a disadvantageous condition.

A switch (second count switch 24) that can detect a game ball that has won a prize in the special winning hole is provided in the special winning hole. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning hole that is in the open state in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of prize balls is small compared to when the game ball enters the big winning hole. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole 1 and the second starting winning hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning hole is in the open state, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to close and the special winning hole is in the closed state, it is impossible for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning hole. be in a disadvantageous condition.

In addition, a second starting opening switch 22B is provided in the second starting winning opening that can detect a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be collectively referred to as starting winning hole or starting opening.

In addition, this pachinko game machine 1 includes a passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole). is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when playing a jackpot game or in the KT state (so-called small winning time), the player can aim at the right side of the gaming area and perform a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, since the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays the role of a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the game enters the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, so the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and furthermore, a frame LED 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. .

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed hitting operation by rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, a first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, e.g. "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot". . Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "losing" symbol. In addition, even in the first special pattern game, it may be configured such that the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player on the condition that the game ball passes through a passage gate 41.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we have prepared multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, variable probability state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.). , jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), probability variable control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

In the KT state, KT control is executed which makes it easier to get a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to obtain a certain amount of prize balls even in the small winning game state, so it is an advantageous state for the player, although the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the jackpot playing state.

In the high base state, a control (time saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period of varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state (time saving state), and the "general symbol hit" in the regular symbol game is executed. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole is also executed by improving the probability that the game will occur more than the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, KT state, and high base state continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the special symbol game being executed a predetermined number of times and the next jackpot game state being started. do. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (number-cutting probability variation, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state, and the display result in the special drawing game is a "jackpot" state. The probability that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed) It is a state where it is done.

When the jackpot game is finished and the game state is controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal symbol game on the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, e.g. "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot". If a predetermined special symbol (a small prize symbol, for example "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small prize". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player on the condition that the game ball passes through a passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed).

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or dots on the frame LED 9 are performed. etc./turning off the light, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting port switches (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, and solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100, and converts it into a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or a solenoid for a big prize opening door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further performs audio control of a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-hand hit notification LED 37. It supplies it to the board 13, and supplies an LED signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing mode of the LED) to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the frame LED 9 and right-handed hitting notification LED 37, and drives the frame LED 9 and right-handed hitting notification LED 37 based on the LED signal in the manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed hit notification LED 37 are turned on/off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of LED lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and LED signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 serves as an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). By the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process process every timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the first special symbol game is realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes a second special symbol process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process process every timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the second special symbol game is realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol simultaneously and in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process for each timer interrupt, control of the jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of the gaming state, etc. are realized (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is used to output a test signal so that the control status of the game machine can be checked from outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the KT state, during a jackpot game, during a small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a first starting winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning in the first starting winning opening, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the first pending storage number. When a starting prize enters the first starting winning hole, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information in the first pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. be done. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the first pending memory number, a transmission is performed to send a production control command to the production control board 12 for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the first pending memory number, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. Settings are made. The performance control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is controlled by the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted to the board 12.

After executing the first starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the first special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, it is determined whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win", or whether it is a "jackpot". The type of jackpot in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a loss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. . After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, multiple types of fluctuation patterns are created using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or "small hit". It includes processing to decide either one. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". This first special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts varying. It includes processing to do. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the first special symbol variation process ends. do.

In addition, in this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process moves to the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) and the first While the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, a small win may occur in the variable display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled to a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is set before the small hit is released). Processing - Determine whether the value corresponds to the small winning end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, do not change the value of the first special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. Thus, if the small winning game is not in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during a small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts fluctuating may be interrupted (the timer may be The update may be suspended).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the gaming state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be interrupted in the normal state, the interruption period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol and the interruption period become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the swinging of the decorative symbols, resulting in a performance that gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small winning ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win in the small win control and no special performance is performed, so the small win ending period is shortened compared to the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since it is easy for the game ball to win in the small win control and an effect that emphasizes the small win control is executed, the small win ending period may be configured to be longer than in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, the small winning ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Furthermore, the length of the small win fanfare period as the small win opening pre-processing period may be varied depending on the gaming state, similarly to the above small win ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". This first special symbol stopping process includes stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and stopping displaying (deriving) a confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the first special symbol. Contains processing to perform settings. Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", a setting process for starting a jackpot game is performed. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off and the display result is "small win", processing for starting a small win game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state will also be updated if the game is controlled to a variable probability state, KT state, or high base state, and if the end of the number cut is established. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

Note that the process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is replaced with "second", the second special symbol process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In addition, in this example, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed by moving to the second special symbol fluctuation processing. While the first special symbol is being displayed, a small win may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled as a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not a small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is set before the small hit is released). Processing - Determine whether the value corresponds to the small hit end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, do not change the value of the second special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process. Thus, if the small winning game is not in progress, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during a small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts fluctuating may be interrupted (the timer may be The update may be suspended).

Regarding the small winning control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small winning fanfare period and the small winning ending period may be varied depending on the gaming state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process processing, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process of the accessory control process (steps S120 to S128), transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The accessory control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal processing, it is monitored whether or not the settings for starting the jackpot game have been made, and if the settings for starting the jackpot game have been made, the processing for starting the jackpot game is performed. , the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is "2". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start the round execution in the jackpot gaming state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening upper limit period for keeping the big winning hole open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". This jackpot opening processing includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a jackpot based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from an open state to a closed state. When returning the grand prize opening to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. , ends the jackpot opening process.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "4". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3". The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "5". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing for making various settings for starting control, KT control, and high base control. When such settings are made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

The small win release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening to be open in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small win release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". This small hit opening process includes a process to measure the elapsed time since the special winning opening was opened, and a timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the special prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small winning end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light emitters such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Controls such as actions are performed to operate various production devices. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 8, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14 . Various performance controls during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/blinking the frame LED 9 and decorative LEDs, are executed by the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, it also includes a ratio of "0%" on one side and a ratio of "100%" on the other hand or a ratio of less than "100%".

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be explained. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1, for example. The pachinko game machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a firing control board, an interface board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A, a second starting port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected, and various presentation devices such as speakers 8L, 8R and frame LED 9 are connected to the presentation control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a main side control board, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, it is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in the board case 21TM201, and controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. It is equipped with various circuits for control. The main board 11 is mainly used for a function of setting random numbers used in the special figure game, a function of inputting signals from switches arranged at predetermined positions, and a sub-side control board consisting of an effect control board 12, etc. , a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and controls the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , and control the variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting/extinguishing/coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has control functions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various winning information regarding winnings is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 is equipped with a microcomputer 100 for game control, which receives detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, as well as various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal. A switch circuit 110 for transmitting data to the terminal board 21TM016, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, as shown in FIG. 9-3, and a display monitor 21TM029 is placed in the center of the main board 11. (for example, 7 segments), and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewed visually. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is open. This is the front when viewed visually, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) controls each winning opening (big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entering area") The number of game balls entering the game ball is tallied, and various winning information such as consecutive ratios and hand ratios based on the tally is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and this winning information is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to check various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the gaming hall. In other words, the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1 usually designs the game board surface so that the game ball enters the general winning hole at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test). In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether the game ball enters the general winning hole at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is checked what kind of adjustments have been made and whether the game balls are entering the general prize opening as often as designed as a result of the adjustments. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and on the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, settings such as jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later, can be changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 when the pachinko game machine 1 is not supplied with power supply voltage, a clerk at the game parlor or the like operates the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, etc. operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) to be described later is performed. executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, power-on operation and initialization operation can be easily performed.

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. It can only be operated by a store clerk who has a designated key. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only a clerk at the game parlor who has a key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by using a predetermined key, but it is also possible to execute this switching operation and also perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a push operation). It may be a possible switch.

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or OFF state even if no force is applied by an employee of the game parlor or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured such that a key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game parlor must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. You can prevent this from happening.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, at the bottom of the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, there are holes for discharging game balls that have entered each winning hole and game balls that have entered the out hole to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and within the nozzle is provided a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting game balls discharged from the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting fired game balls). ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

Control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 are relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a production control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, frame LEDs 9, and decorations. Contains LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of LEDs.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and includes at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port, etc. constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a payout control CPU21TM371, a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the bulb out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number counting switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number counting switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 includes a gaming machine frame open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and a gaming machine frame opening sensor that allows the front surface of the gaming board 2 to be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 comprising a door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the frame is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine if an error has occurred. Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the microcomputer for payout control 21TM370 is capable of distinguishing and recognizing the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor that includes a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that game balls are jammed, that is, so-called ball biting. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 detects that the detection signal from the bulb out switch 21TM187 indicates the bulb is out, and the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank. , the ball payout process is stopped.

Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets a low level to the firing board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball firing from the batted ball firing device. Outputs a full tank signal. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one input side of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the ejection board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the ejection motor 21TM094) A signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting and outputting (sending and receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the microcomputer 100 for game control and the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control are connected via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) to confirm the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and sends a signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, it transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) notifying that to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and A ball request signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by differentiating a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and uses the set received ACK signal to play the game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (such as a ball borrowed, full tank, or out of ball error) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is changed. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of rented balls to the terminal boards (an external terminal board for the frame and an external terminal board for the board) via the output port 21TM372b. )21TM160. Note that a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but its illustration is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing lighting/extinguishment is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out of ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. Note that a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Furthermore, the drive signal from the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Note that a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but its illustration is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine is equipped with a card unit control microcomputer. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connection stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are provided from the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050 in response to the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending possible display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball rental switch is operated and the ball rental switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to send a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, upon receiving a payout command signal from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power is supplied from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided on the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. This will be prevented.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value. In detail, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. . The set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

FIGS. 9-4(A) to 9-4(F) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each setting value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. Each display result determination table has two cases: the variable special symbol designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, a determination value for determining a jackpot is set for each case where the second special symbol is subject to variable display.

As shown in Figure 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 1, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display. If the set value is ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', or ``6'', the probability of winning the jackpot will be lower (1/300). ing. In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/300) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/280) than in other cases. In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/280) than when the number is "2". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 4, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/250) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/235) than when the numbers are "2", "3", or "4". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/235) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/220) than when the numbers are "2", "3", "4", or "5". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot A to jackpot F). That is, winning the jackpot is determined with probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether to use the jackpot symbol or not.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F) to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. A common table is used to determine the jackpot in the case where the first special symbol is a variable display and the case where the second special symbol is a variable display, regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good too.

In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The number of setting values that can be set may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion effect)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the setting value to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends depending on the specified setting value. FIGS. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. Figure 9-5 (1) is an example where a "sunny" ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen, and Figure 9-5 (2) is an example where a "cloudy" ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the "rain" style ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 9-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 sends a setting command specifying a setting value to the production control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits a performance control command for executing an ending performance on the image display device 5 to the performance control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting values by storing the setting values specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on an effect control command that is sent when the jackpot gaming state ends, the image display device 5 stores it together with characters that notify that the jackpot gaming state has ended (the characters "BONUS END"). It becomes possible to display the ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the setting values.

The table shown in Figure 9-5 (4) shows cases where the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , respectively, when the setting suggestion presentation mode is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), when the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), and when the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 5(3), a determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the production control CPU 120 suggests the setting of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium rate (for example, 40%), and (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the production control CPU 120 sets the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and at a medium level. (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the production control CPU 120 sets the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and at a medium rate. (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by varying the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggestion performance depending on the setting value, the player becomes interested in the manner in which the setting suggestion performance is executed, and the setting suggestion It is possible to improve the interest of the performance. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect that is executed when the jackpot game state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect what will happen.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be explained.
FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of a process executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, one of 0 to 5. (Step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, are normal values as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, and six levels of setting values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above, and the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above. The setting value 5 in this example corresponds to the setting value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine manufacturer (before it is installed in the game parlor), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the setting value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. Note that if the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, the value may not be normal. If the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is checked whether the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when transitioning to a setting change mode to be described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 checks whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether it has been decided that RAM clear (initialization of gaming state) will be executed, and if the value is 1, it has been decided that RAM clear will be executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, RAM clearing is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, RAM clearing is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and when the power is restored, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the gaming state will be initialized may be made before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, or may be notified after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, as will be described later. It is also possible to do so.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine slot 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine slot 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. , it is possible to separately recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Note that the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 sends a detection signal to the game control microcomputer 100 indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. In the case of a configuration in which a detection signal indicating that the By inputting the detection signal, it becomes possible to individually recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process moves to steps S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When the setting change mode is entered, the setting values can be confirmed and changed, and when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the setting values can be confirmed.

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and no power outage has occurred during the setting change, ( The setting value can be changed and/or provided that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). Or confirmation becomes possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is selected. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (sending a setting command), which will be described later, without being controlled by the mode.

In this embodiment, in order to create a state in which change of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that both conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied through the determination processing in step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is further set based on (3) determining that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As described later, on the condition that the setting value is changed, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

As mentioned above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to check or change the setting value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, or there is some kind of unauthorized operation. There is a possibility that the setting value is about to be confirmed or changed by the means. It is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting values in such a state, so in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. and setting change mode.

In this embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. However, the control is not limited to this form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and setting change mode will be activated. It is also possible not to control any of them.

On the other hand, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, if both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, the process moves to step S21TM4760 (sending a setting command), which will be described later, without being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, if it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the control is not performed in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 (described later) (Send configuration command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the values stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , the process moves to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, the determination in step S21TM4010 is NO. Then, the process moves to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) being met. It will be controlled by the mode. Furthermore, even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that conditions for transition to the setting change mode (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140, which will be described later) are satisfied. In addition, if the setting change mode was being controlled when the previous power-off occurred, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) are satisfied. It turns out.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 checks whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes from step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, if both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, in step S21TM4130, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), in step S21TM4140, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 detects that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal, without executing the processing from step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. A set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the production control CPU 120.

When receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the production control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message saying "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Furthermore, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to first turn off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned OFF) and then transition to a setting change mode when the power is turned on again (power switch 21TM055 is turned ON). notification to prompt the user to perform an operation to change the setting value (confirm the setting value). For example, a message such as "Please turn the power off and on again to enter the setting change mode" is displayed. Incidentally, similar notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is cut off.

In this loop process, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the CPU 103 displays a message such as "E" on the display monitor 21TM029, indicating that the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5). Even though there is a possibility, the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode (determined as YES in all steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) are not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode is not performed. Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on multiple gaming machines, a card unit or call lamp device installed corresponding to the gaming machine, etc.) be done.

During the loop processing period, the letter "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display included in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms wait, excessive heat is prevented from accumulating in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. Furthermore, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, an external device such as a hall computer can detect a predetermined event (in this example, the setting value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal). ) may not have occurred, but the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode have not been satisfied and the change to the setting change mode has not occurred.

The loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and if a power outage occurs while changing the settings ( In other words, if the setting changing flag was set when the power was turned on and the determination is YES in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before proceeding to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to confirm the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to transition to setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to enter a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state, (3) Three conditions are required: the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied through the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be changed ( (setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) are not met, changes to the set value will not be permitted, and the set value in the set value storage area will not be fixed to the regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to proceed to normal game processing. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in any of the determination processes in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the process moves to the loop process described above (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).

Once the loop processing (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) has been entered, it will not be possible to proceed to the normal game processing, so the staff at the gaming parlor must first turn off the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then turn it on again. It won't happen. In this way, if the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode are not met, turn off the power and make sure all conditions (1) to (3) are met the next time the power is turned on. Then, the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value in the setting value storage area is determined to be the normal value.

Note that, if any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in a predetermined manner. The light may be emitted in a power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

In this embodiment, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Two conditions are required: (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even if the following two conditions are satisfied (YES in step S21TM4130), the setting confirmation mode will not be entered. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are met, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), The game is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but is controlled to a gaming stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be explained using FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 checks whether the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (in this example, any one of 0 to 5). Step S21TM4510). If a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process moves to step S21TM4530. If the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores "0", which has the lowest jackpot probability, as the regular value in the set value storage area. is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process moves to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off processing, the CPU 103 checks whether a power-off signal based on a power-off, including an unexpected power outage, etc., has been input, and if a power-off signal has been input, the CPU 103 interrupts the power supply. Immediately before operation becomes impossible due to a stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the repeating process from step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or the repeating process from step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply If a power outage occurs, a data check will be appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display values corresponding to the setting values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the staff at the game parlor usually recognizes the range of set values as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as is on the display monitor 21TM029, the staff at the game hall will not be able to see the actual value. There is a risk that the setting value may be recognized incorrectly. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode is controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process moves to step S21TM4680. The performance control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on receiving the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 determines that the setting value has not been changed. A flag indicating that there is a possibility that the setting is being changed is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off. Therefore, if power is cut off while being controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is set to 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command specifying that the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4590). The production control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on receiving the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting changeover switch information indicating whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and checks whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the game parlor clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled to the setting change mode (when the power was turned on or when the previous power was turned off) was 3. If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area will be updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the setting values will be updated on the display monitor 21TM029. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and send a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) and the state in which the setting value update (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (determined as NO in step S21TM4040, and the RAM clear flag is remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and also to send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the setting value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 sends the setting confirmation mode command, it sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that allows it to be identified that the setting confirmation mode command has been sent and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 sends the setting change mode command, it is configured to set a setting change mode command transmission flag that allows it to be identified that the setting change mode command has been sent and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , when the setting change in progress flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a 4 ms wait (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes from step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

In step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal will continue to be output until the value of the security signal timer reaches 0ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the normal gaming process is started. will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when it reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms, regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The value of the security signal timer is set so that in response to the end of control in any of the modes, the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 second has elapsed from the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is determined which mode is being controlled). ) is executed as a common process. Furthermore, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is performed regardless of whether the control is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is not necessary to determine which mode is controlled). ) is executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by making the security signal output start control and output end control common between the settings change mode and the settings confirmation mode. , the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of a security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the output of the security signal is started in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping the game, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, a common value (1000 ms) is sent to the security signal in the case where the control is in the setting change mode and in the case where the control is in the setting confirmation mode. It's set on a timer. However, if the output start control and output end control of the security signal are made common between when controlled to the setting change mode and when controlled to the setting change mode, it is difficult to select which mode on the external device side. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the system is being controlled.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is sent in step S21TM4710. After setting the timer value to 1000ms, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770, which will be described later, in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM, the security signal timer value is reset (overwritten) to 30000ms. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in Figure 9-9 (2). If the control is in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation mode ends. This is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode, and if the setting change mode has been controlled, the timing is the time when 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, if the control is in the setting confirmation mode (RAM is not cleared and the security signal timer value is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is allowed. In processing (for example, information output processing), the security signal continues to be output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 1000 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM clearing is performed). (when the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000ms to 0ms in game control timer interrupt processing (for example, information output processing) after permission for interrupts. The security signal will continue to be output until In addition, when the control is in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer changes for a predetermined period of time (1000ms or 30000ms) before proceeding to the game control timer interrupt process. ) to 0ms, and after the output of the security signal is finished, the game control timer interrupt process may be started.

In this way, the security signal will continue to be output for at least 1 sec when the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished and when the control in the setting change mode is finished, and the control is changed to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal will continue to be output until 30 seconds have passed after the control in the setting change mode ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the output control of the security signal and to make the output period of the security signal different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled.

As a result, it is also possible to determine whether the external device is controlled to setting confirmation mode without executing initialization processing, or whether it is controlled to setting change mode after initialization processing is executed. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode has been entered without initialization processing being executed, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode has been set. It is possible to estimate that the setting change mode may have been controlled by executing the conversion process.

Note that the security signal is also output when the abnormality detection sensor detects a game stoppage error such as a magnetic abnormality. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until the gaming machine is powered off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (an area cleared by initialization processing) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored, a security signal is output for 4 minutes.

Here, if the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, RAM clearing is not executed, so the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output process and remains set. It is possible to output the security signal continuously for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to not limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode until one second has elapsed. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is selected when the power is restored, the RAM will be cleared, so the abnormality detection flag will be cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (when the power is turned off). As a result, the output period of the security signal is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have elapsed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). period).

Note that in the example shown in step S21TM4710 in FIG. 9-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second, but this is not the only option. The value of the security signal timer to be set may be at least a period that allows the external device to recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common value of 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process in step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Since the setting changing flag is cleared, if the power is cut off after this point, it will be determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) when the power is restored. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in a setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that even if the device is not controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of setting values is 1 to 6, and the CPU 120 side for effect control uses the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) as it is in the image. If it is displayed on the display device 5, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command plus 1 as the setting value (1 to 6), and Within the range, an effect that suggests the set value is executed.

In addition, the CPU 103 is not limited to this form, and the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area to a setting command, and performs production control. The information may also be sent to the CPU 120 for personal use. As a result, the range of setting values specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. The effect control CPU 120 side displays the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command on the image display device 5 as is, or executes an effect that suggests the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command. By doing so, the setting value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Furthermore, it is not necessary for the performance control CPU 120 to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command, and the control burden on the performance control CPU 120 can be reduced.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Furthermore, it is possible to suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the setting value to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends depending on the specified setting value.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), which means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) and the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4010). YES in S21TM4020), and there is no power outage during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute processing at the time of power-off recovery that does not involve clearing the RAM.

If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and executes the game control timer interrupt process (special (including pattern processing, etc.). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control in the setting confirmation mode ends, the CPU 103 clears the RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clearing, a backup command is sent as a command at the time of power-off recovery, and a transition to normal game processing is made.

Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the performance control CPU 120 determines that recovery from the power outage has been performed based on the data at the time of power supply interruption (RAM has not been cleared). Recognize the following: Upon receiving the backup command, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 have been restored from the power outage based on the data at the time of the power supply stoppage. It is possible to notify that the RAM has not been cleared.

On the other hand, the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), which means that RAM clear was set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it was decided to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to perform power-on processing that involves clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes processing to set 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer, and processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After permission for interruption, it is sufficient to proceed to game control timer interruption processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, pending memory, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply stop, which is stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is is set, but the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and remain unchanged from before the RAM clearing process. In addition, the area where each aggregate value (gaming information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base is stored for each setting value is not cleared, and each aggregate value for each setting value is not cleared. The value remains unchanged from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). Note that by the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, data on the count value of a counter for generating random numbers for normal symbol hit determination) is initialized to 0, but any value or predetermined value may be initialized. It may be initialized to . Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data on the count value of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol hit determination) may be left as is.

The reason why the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are not cleared in this RAM clearing process is as follows: (a) If the setting value storage area is not controlled by the setting change mode, the normal value will not be stored in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if the setting change mode is controlled, the value in the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the value in the setting change mode is This is because a normal value is stored due to the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode cannot be controlled and there is no opportunity to change the values stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 in a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). Through the processing in step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of prize balls, a special symbol process flag, etc., are set to flags for selectively processing according to the control state. Initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, a jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that the initialization process was performed when the power was turned on (or when the setting change mode ended) (step S21TM1460). Based on the reception of this initialization command, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the initialization process has been performed (RAM clearing has been performed without recovery from power outage based on the data at the time of power supply interruption). be aware of what happened). When the performance control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the game state etc. have been initialized in the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 (data at the time of power supply stop). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovery from a power outage based on the following.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value of the security signal timer (1 second) that was set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Furthermore, if RAM clearing is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being performed. On the other hand, if RAM clearing is not executed (including when controlled to setting confirmation mode), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second set in step S21TM4710. It remains as it is.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, a security signal will be output in the game control timer interrupt process after interrupt permission (information output process), After that, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 executes a setting process for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, it is set to the interrupt disabled state (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, it is set to the interrupt enabled state. settings (step S21TM1540). Thereby, the game control timer interrupt process is shifted to the normal game process that can be executed. In this example, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a jackpot, or a random number for determining whether to set it as a reach when it is not a jackpot, and is a random number for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating random numbers for display. In addition, the initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. In this example, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating random numbers for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit. It is a random number to A game control process that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices provided in the game machine, such as the performance display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device) by itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer (also referred to as gaming machine control process), the count value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination When the counter is incremented by the number of numeric values between the minimum and maximum possible values), the initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. The process moves to the power-off recovery process without confirmation (regardless of the status of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), but the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), on the condition that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), ), the process may be shifted to the processing at the time of power-off recovery.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without checking (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process moves to the power-on process (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)), but in this form, However, if it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the condition is that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (gaming machine frame 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may proceed to the process when the power is turned on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

As described above, when turning on the power, the clerk of the game parlor, etc. turns on the lock switch 21TM051 and turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, thereby putting the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode. In addition to being able to control the game, it is also possible to initialize the gaming state, etc. (to execute RAM clearing). Moreover, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also control the gaming state etc. It becomes possible to not initialize the RAM clear flag (not to set the RAM clear flag to 1 by making a NO determination in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). In this way, the clerk at the game parlor can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state, etc. There is.

As mentioned above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was set when the power was turned off, so the setting value is unstable. There is a possibility that the setting value that the game parlor is trying to confirm is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), but puts the game in the stopped state (step A loop process from S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) can be controlled, and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from starting with unstable set values (the timer interrupt processing for game control is executed), and also to prevent the power from being turned on when the power is turned on. When a power failure occurs, it is possible to notify an external device that the controller is in the setting change mode.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 sets the conditions ( If all of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES), a set value abnormality error command is sent (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor is activated in the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). An error message is displayed in 21TM029 by displaying the letter "E" (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality has occurred to the clerk at the game hall (in the setting change mode). This clearly indicates that a power outage may have occurred while the system was under control. In addition, upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a message on the image display device 5 saying, "Please turn the power back on after the power is turned off and shift to the setting change mode." A store clerk, etc., must first turn off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned OFF), and then when the power is turned back on (power switch 21TM055 is turned ON), the operation is to change the settings by changing the settings to the setting change mode. A notification is sent to prompt the user to perform the following steps (confirm the setting value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are satisfied, that is, (i) when the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If the determination is YES), the setting change mode is entered. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the production control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power. "Please move to setting change mode") will not be performed.

Here, the production control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) confirms that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), it is possible to notify that the setting value can be changed. For example, it is possible to display a message on the image display device 5 such as "You are in setting change mode" or "Please perform a setting change operation to change the setting value." As a result, the staff of the game hall can understand that the control is in the setting change mode, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area can be changed. By changing the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing it to the planned setting value, the setting value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to normal gaming processing.

On the other hand, (b) if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are not satisfied, that is, if any of the above (i) to (iii) If any of the conditions is not satisfied, the game is not controlled to the setting change mode, but is controlled to the gaming stop state (loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) after sending the setting value abnormal error command (step S21TM4190). . As a result, an error display is executed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029), and a message is displayed on the production control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power. ”) will also be performed.

In this way, an error display is executed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029), and a message is displayed on the production control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. ”) is also performed, the condition of the gaming machine is that even though the power was cut off during the settings change mode, the conditions for transitioning to the settings change mode after the power is restored are It will be reported that the condition is not established. In this case, the staff at the gaming parlor understands that the game is not being controlled by the setting change mode and is in a stopped state (it is necessary to turn the power back on to change the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off, the power is turned on again by performing operations such that conditions (i) to (iii) for transition to the setting change mode are all satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF. By switching to this state, the set value can be determined and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to normal game processing.

In this way, if a power failure occurs in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, in case (a) where the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are met when the power is restored, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed. This means that the setting change mode is automatically entered without being interrupted, and unnecessary error displays can be avoided and changes to the setting values can be appropriately prompted.

On the other hand, in case (b) where the conditions for transitioning to the settings change mode are not met when the power is restored, the system cannot transition to the settings change mode when the power is restored even though a power outage occurred during the settings change mode. Therefore, the game is forcibly controlled to a stopped state (loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is It will be done. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not determined, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

Note that if the settings change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), if all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transitioning to the settings change mode are satisfied, and if the transition condition (i) ) to (iii) may not hold, a different command may be sent as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition conditions are met, this is a command that indicates that the setting value may be abnormal, and the mode has been transitioned to setting change mode (or the conditions for transition are satisfied). When the production control CPU 120 receives this command, it displays the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "You will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode" as an image. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to send the setting value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the transition to normal game processing occurs, when the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated. (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 to the performance control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch )21TM052 is operated (changed from OFF state to ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from game control microcomputer 100 to production control CPU 120.

The production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) is controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on receiving the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation to change the setting value has been performed even though the setting value has not been set, and to notify that fact. For example, on the basis of receiving a lock switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is executed to display the words "Lock switch operation has been detected" on the image display device 5. Furthermore, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is executed to display the words "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." As a result, game parlor staff, etc. can clearly understand that an operation has been performed to change the setting value even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can prevent fraud. You can check whether this is being done.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to normal game processing, it determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated or not. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without checking whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when normal game processing (timer interrupt processing for game control) is being executed, the execution status of operations for changing setting values and operations for checking setting values is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine slot 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120); ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the setting change mode is entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not only in this form, but as shown in Figure 9-11, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are met. It is also possible to set the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150) and shift to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without checking whether this is true.

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) or if the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the settings are changed. The process is different from the process shown in FIG. 9-6 in that it is controlled in the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled in the gaming stop state (processing corresponding to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). The other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in this case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting change mode is entered based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of a game machine when a power outage occurs during a change.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting change mode is set (NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value in the setting value storage area can be changed.) On the other hand, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether the three conditions are met or not, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power outage occurs while the control is in the settings change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) will be applied based on the fact that the settings change flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically being controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting value is established, it is possible to improve the work efficiency for determining the setting value.

Here, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting It will be controlled by the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state. (Steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determining YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the clerk at the game parlor who has performed the operation to change the setting value must first turn the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state in order to confirm the setting value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the conditions for starting control in the setting change mode are determined depending on whether the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). While the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode are made different, the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common, thereby clarifying the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode. The game is appropriately transitioned to normal game processing.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be provided. good. For example, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150, and sends a setting value abnormal error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). After receiving the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110), the production control CPU 120 says, "Turn the lock switch ON once, and then switch it OFF after changing the set value." The message may also be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and FIG. 9-11, it is not possible to proceed to the normal game process while the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the game machine manufacturer ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before it is installed in the game hall), it is possible to set the setting change flag in advance. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is ended, the pachinko game machine 1 cannot be played. Thereby, when installing the pachinko game machine 1 at a game parlor, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform a setting change operation, and take measures to confirm the set value.

(Set value memory control in case of power outage while changing set values)
Next, setting value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing a setting value will be explained using FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed.

First, FIG. 9 shows the control when the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode). This will be explained using -12(1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as the setting value in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and 1 is added to the read setting value. The sum of "1" will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is set to "0" based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. "2" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the set value after the change. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Furthermore, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area becomes "1". is changed to "2", and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation to end the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the setting value storage area. In the power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is the value that was stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and 1 is added to the read setting value. The sum of "3" will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Note that when the power is turned on in order 6, the setting change flag is set, so when applying the control shown in Figure 9-11, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in order 6 and order 7 may be in the OFF state.

In this way, if the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without terminating the setting change mode), when the power is restored, , the setting value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the planned setting values may have already been set, and in this case, the arcade staff can exit the setting change mode without having to perform an operation to change the setting values again. Since it is only necessary to shift the game machine to normal game processing by using the above command, work efficiency can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the setting value change operation is performed during the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends), This will be explained using FIG. 9-12 (2).

Orders 1 to 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12(1), and their explanation will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby ending the setting change mode. As a result, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3", which is the determined set value plus 1, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, an operation is performed to turn off the power switch 21TM055, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and 1 is added to the read setting value. The sum of "3" will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

As shown in Figure 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the settings change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the settings change mode is controlled. In either case, when the power is restored, the setting values that have been changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the setting values that were stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power was turned off, are restored. , is a valid setting value (the setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

Note that the storage control of setting values is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 9-12. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is activated. 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is ended (turning on the lock switch 21TM051). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area, and the setting value is confirmed based on the fact that an operation for switching from the state to the OFF state has been performed. It's okay. In this case, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. According to the change in the setting value stored in the display monitor 21TM029, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 will also change.

With such a configuration, even if the power is turned on and the setting change mode is activated and a setting change operation is performed (the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the settings will not be changed. If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without the lock switch 21TM051 being switched to the OFF state), the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 will be lost to the power supply. This means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the setting values that were stored in the setting value storage area when the power was last turned on are still held. Therefore, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode after the power is restored are stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was last turned on. The value corresponds to the setting value that was previously set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value in the event that power is cut off while the device is controlled in the setting change mode. Furthermore, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, changes to the set value can be restricted.

The controls related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiments are provided for a gaming machine that has a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) and has different jackpot probabilities depending on the setting values. This is applicable, but is not limited to this.Although multiple setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is the same regardless of the setting value (for example, for all setting values 0 to 5) It is also applicable to gaming machines (where the jackpot probability is 1/300).

Further, the present feature section 21TM discloses the following invention.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Furthermore, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding gaming machines such as those described in JP-A No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), when changing setting values, etc., it is necessary for the external device to understand the control state related to the settings. However, even if the conventional gaming machine signal output technology described in JP-A-2014-200506 (Paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to understand this. be. The inventions related to means O1 to means O4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the outside of the gaming machine of the control state related to the settings.

The gaming machine of means O1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) that can execute control (jackpot judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot judgment). A gaming machine 1), which includes a setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed, and a setting value that can be checked. a setting confirmation mode control means (a gaming control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode, and a control means for controlling either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. A specific signal output means (gaming control microcomputer 100 that outputs the security signal in step S21TM4560) outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start, and a value related to the period during which the specific signal is output (security signal timer). (a gaming control microcomputer 100 that sets the value of the security signal timer), and the setting means is controlled in the setting change mode and in the setting confirmation mode. (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), and the specific signal output means can set a common predetermined value in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In response to the end of the control, a specific signal is output until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value has elapsed (according to the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is continued until one second has elapsed from the end of the setting confirmation mode). (The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the setting change mode.) According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the settings can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of means O2 is the gaming machine of means O1, and initializes the gaming state (step S21TM4050, RAM clear based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4150 (step S21TM1410)) (100), the initializing means initializes the gaming state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, After setting the predetermined value (after setting the value of the security signal timer to 1 second in step S21TM4710), the setting means sets the time period to be longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. A specific value corresponding to a long period can be set (30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 when RAM clearing is executed), and the specific signal output means is configured to change the setting. In response to the end of mode control, a specific signal is output until the period corresponding to the specific value has elapsed (as the setting change mode ends, the security signal continues until 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode) ). According to this, a specific signal is output for at least a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when control in the setting change mode ends and when control in the setting confirmation mode ends, and when the setting change mode ends. When the mode is controlled, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so while the setting process by the setting means is standardized, different outputs are output in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. It becomes possible to set a period.

The gaming machine of the means O3 is the gaming machine of the means O1 or the means O2, and in the setting change mode, a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680) is performed. If the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without detection), the specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102) that stores specific information (setting change flag) is used to detect the transition to setting change mode. Based on this, the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580, and based on the completion of the setting changing mode, the setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM4720. is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored), the game is stopped. and output a specific signal (based on the fact that the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are not met, the processes of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 are repeatedly executed until the power is turned off). shall be. According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The gaming machine of the means O4 is any gaming machine selected from the means O1 to O3, and includes a game control means (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of the game. 100), and a performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that controls the execution of the performance, and the game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029) and the setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step The game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of S21TM4620) and the setting change mode in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF without performing any specific operation to end the setting change mode (step S21TM4680) Specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102, set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode) A gaming control microcomputer 100) that sets a changing flag and clears the changing setting flag in step S21TM4720 based on the completion of the setting change mode, and starts supplying power to the gaming machine. In this case, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), an error notification is displayed on the display means. At the same time, it is possible to send an error command to the production control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210). In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means issues a notification prompting an operation to change the set value (the image display device 5 may display a message "Restart the power after the power is turned off"). Please enter the settings change mode.'' According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the staff at the gaming parlor, and the operator can be prompted to perform an operation to change the setting value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in JP-A No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a setting value. The inventions related to means P1 to means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. It is about providing.

The gaming machine of the means P1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) that can execute control (jackpot judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to the setting value (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot judgment). A gaming machine 1), which includes a setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed; Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the control has been performed (setting change in progress flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and step S21TM4580 is set based on the completion of the setting change mode) A gaming control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in S21TM4720, and the specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped ( The value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is restored) (If it is determined in step S21TM4030 that the setting change flag is set), an error notification means that can execute error notification (if the conditions for transition to the setting change mode are not met, an error notification is issued in step S21TM4210) It is characterized by further comprising a game control microcomputer 100) that performs display. According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of the means P2 is the gaming machine of the means P1, and the setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state). , the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), and the setting change mode can be controlled, and power supply to the gaming machine is started. In this case, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored), the setting change condition is satisfied. (Based on the determination of YES in all steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 at power-on, (The setting change mode is entered without proceeding to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220.) According to this, when the conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are met, the setting change mode is controlled without executing an error notification, thereby avoiding unnecessary error notifications and appropriately changing the setting value. Can encourage change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is the gaming machine of means P1 or means P2, and when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (power supply If it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of recovery), it is possible to execute the error notification and bring the game to a halt state (when the power is turned on, it is possible to enter the setting changing mode). If the transition condition is not satisfied (if the determination is NO in any of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140), the process transitions to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without transitioning to the setting change mode.) It is characterized by According to this, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of the means P4 is any gaming machine selected from the means P1 to P3, and includes a game control means (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that controls the progress of the game. 100), and a performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that controls the execution of the performance, and the game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The game machine comprises the setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and the specific information storage means, and when power supply to the game machine is started. When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the error notification is executed on the display unit. At the same time, it is possible to send an error command to the production control means (a set value abnormal error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display in step S21TM4210). In response to receiving the error command, the production control means issues a notification prompting an operation to change the set value (the image display device 5 displays the message "Turn the power back on after turning off the power"), in response to receiving the error command. Please enter setting change mode.'' According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the staff at the gaming parlor, and the operator can be prompted to perform an operation to change the setting value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in JP-A-2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a setting value. The inventions related to Means Q1 to Means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. It's about doing.

The gaming machine of the means Q1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) that can execute control (such as jackpot judgment processing in special symbol process processing) according to the setting value (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot judgment). A gaming machine 1), which includes a setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed; Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the control has been performed (setting change in progress flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and step S21TM4580 is set based on the completion of the setting change mode) A gaming control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in S21TM4720, and the specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped ( (The value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102), and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored), the setting changing mode is controlled (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state). , regardless of whether the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are met, that is, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. , automatically controls the setting change mode). According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined when power supply is stopped in the setting change mode that involves initialization of the gaming state. It should be noted that the gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050, step S21TM4150 It may further include a game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410).

The gaming machine of means Q2 is the gaming machine of means Q1, and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. If not, the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change condition being met (if the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame is 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the RAM is When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. is controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting change mode is set. (The setting change mode is automatically controlled regardless of whether the conditions for transition are met or not.) According to this, if a power outage occurs during setting change mode control, based on the fact that specific information is stored when the power is restored, the setting change mode will be activated even if the setting change conditions are not met. Since it is controlled, work efficiency can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q3 is the gaming machine of the means Q1 or the means Q2, and the setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on, the setting is being changed). When the flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (clear switch (setting) 21TM052 is in the ON state, RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends). and the setting change mode is terminated based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680). The specific information storage means stores the specific information when controlled to the setting change mode (sets a setting change in progress flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started). ), erases the specific information when the settings change mode ends based on the specific operation (clears the settings change flag at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the settings change mode control ends), and changes the settings. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the mode control means is configured to select the setting change mode when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation has been performed. (If the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the mode is automatically setting change mode), and terminating the setting change mode based on the specific operation (terminating the setting change mode based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680). It is characterized by According to this, the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of the means Q4 is any gaming machine selected from the means Q1 to Q3, and has a setting value that stores a setting value (6 levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). It is equipped with a storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 in which setting values are stored), and can execute control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage means. Yes, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the changing operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610) (to change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area), and the setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode ( The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680), and the setting value storage means stores the specified operation when the setting change mode is controlled. When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without being executed, the setting values changed by the changing operation in the setting changing mode are continuously stored (the setting value storage area is the backup area of the RAM 102). If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area will be changed. Even if a power outage occurs, the set value changed by the change operation is retained. According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the set value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power outage is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value according to the set value is stored in the set value storage means. Since control is executed, work efficiency can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is any gaming machine selected from the means Q1 to Q3, and has a setting value that stores a setting value (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). It is equipped with a storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 in which setting values are stored), and can execute control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage means. The setting change mode control means performs a change operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area). changing only the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting values that have been set), and changing the setting values stored in the setting value storage means based on a specific operation after the changing operation. At the same time, the setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is transferred to the setting value storage area). (the setting value is stored in the gaming machine to confirm it as a valid setting value and terminate the setting change mode), and the setting value storage means stores the setting value in the game machine without performing the specific operation when the setting value storage means is controlled in the setting change mode. When the power supply is stopped, the setting value before the changing operation is performed in the setting change mode is memorized (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the lock switch If the 21TM051 is not turned off, the setting values themselves stored in the setting value storage area will not be changed, so if a power outage occurs during the setting change mode, the setting values before being controlled to the setting change mode will be changed. is characterized by being retained). According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 052IW)
Next, the characteristic part 052IW will be explained. First, the gaming state in this feature section 052IW will be explained. First, the gaming states in this feature section 052IW include a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) where small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, the first KT state and the second KT state, and in this feature part 052IW, the gaming state includes a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). There are two cases: controlled to a low probability and first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and controlled to a high probability and first KT state (high probability/first KT state). , and may be controlled to a high probability and second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

Among the KT states, in the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is open for an extremely long time, and a small hit is likely to occur. Even if this occurs, there are extremely few cases in which a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to be in a state where small hits are likely to occur, and it is also controlled to be in a high base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In addition, in the second KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to be in a state where small hits are likely to occur, and it is also controlled to be in a low base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short.

Furthermore, the KT state is a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic part 052IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a hit is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Then, when the first special symbol changes, the percentage of small hits is determined to be low, while when the second special symbol changes, the percentage of small wins is determined to be high (however, as will be described later). (excluding the case of a forced loss), the KT state is a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits occur frequently mainly by changing the second special symbol, resulting in a gaming state advantageous to the player.

Note that the configuration for making the KT state a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a normal symbol is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain period of time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may also be possible to create a gaming state in which it is easier to win a small hit.

In addition, this feature section 052IW is configured such that the time required from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until it reaches the variable prize winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group that forms the falling path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in this characteristic part 052IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, and in the first KT state described later, the game ball passes through. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, it reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Since this is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, if one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state and the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, The game balls can be entered into the variable winning ball device 6B as they are.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in this feature part 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 that is formed as the bottom of the channel through which the game balls flow. By moving the bottom member 052IW108 backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward, the grand prize opening which becomes the winning area is brought into the open state. The game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball that has won in the big winning hole is further guided to a guide path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guide route 052IW100 further branches into two routes 052IW102, 103, and the game ball guided to the guide route 052IW100 is guided to the left route 052IW102 or the right route 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball enters the ejection area 052IW105 and is detected by the ejection area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left route 052IW102, and when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, the game guided to the guiding route 052IW100 The ball enters the left path 052IW102 and can enter the V area 052IW104. Further, when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 enters the right side path 052IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

In addition, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the jackpot game is controlled, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106, and after the jackpot game ends. Controlled to a variable state.

Note that the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the ejection area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be determined that there is a large winning opening input/output mismatch error, and the configuration may be configured to notify the error. In this case, since it takes a certain amount of time for the winning game ball to reach the V area 052IW104 or the discharge area 052IW105 just before the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, it may be configured to determine that there is a large winning hole input/output mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in this feature section 052IW. In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 23 and the second count switch 24)), the detection signals from the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 81 for the big prize opening door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special prize opening, it is transmitted to the solenoid 052IW109 for the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101.

(Jackpot probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and small win probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 10-4 shows the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, this example shows a configuration in which the settings can be changed in six steps from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the settings can be changed in 6 stages, but may be configured so that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 stages, or the settings can be changed in 7 stages or more, for example.

First, using FIG. 10-3, the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be explained. In the example shown in Figure 10-3 (A), in the non-probability variable state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "247/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 10-3 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall probability of winning the jackpot is 10 times higher than in the non-variable state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is the lowest, "2050/65536", and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2470/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in Figures 10-3 (A) and (B), regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", The small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536" regardless of whether the state is a variable state (state) or a variable probability state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining a small hit is common regardless of the setting value, and is common between the non-probability variable state and the probability variable state. Even if the configuration is such that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value while the small hit probability remains constant, the miss probability By varying the set values from "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be configured to match.

Next, using FIG. 10-4, the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be explained. In the example shown in Figure 10-4 (A), in the variable probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "247/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 10-4 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall probability of winning the jackpot is 10 times higher than in the non-variable state (low probability state), and the setting When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is the lowest, "2050/65536", and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2470/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in Figures 10-4 (A) and (B), regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", The small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536" regardless of whether the state is a variable state (state) or a variable probability state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining a small hit is common regardless of the setting value, and is common between the non-probability variable state and the probability variable state. However, in this example, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 10-4), the small hit is smaller than when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 10-3). The winning probability is approximately 10 times higher (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the same as the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the first special symbol). (more than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even if the configuration is such that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value while the small hit probability remains constant, the miss probability will vary as shown in Figures 10-4 (A) and (B). By varying the set values from "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be configured to match.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the judgment value corresponding to the deviation is included in the judgment values corresponding to all the setting values "1" to "6" (Fig. -3 and as shown in Figure 10-4, there is no set value for which the probability of failure is 0). The judgment value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the setting value (as shown in Figures 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the setting values "1" to "6" , the probability of failure is different).

Note that the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured such that, for example, there is a case where the probability of failure is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to failure). For example, with the setting value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the probability of losing is 0, and the configuration may be such that the determination value corresponding to the loss is not included.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured such that, for example, there is a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include a judgment value corresponding to a small win). For example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol (Figure 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit may not be included. good.

In addition, in Figures 10-3 (A), (B) and Figures 10-4 (A), (B), the small hit probability is the same in the variable probability state (high probability state) and the variable probability state (low probability state). The probabilities of winning and losing are different, but the probability of a small hit is higher in a variable state (high probability state) than in a variable state (low probability state) because the probability of a jackpot is higher in a variable state (high probability state) than in a variable state (low probability state). It is also possible to lower the probability of failure and match the probability of failure. Furthermore, even if the set values are different, for example "1" and "2", the jackpot probability and the small win probability may be made to match each other. As a result, in gaming machines that have less than 6 actual settable stages or where there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, the hardware/software configuration of gaming machines that have a 6-step setting change function and can be standardized, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIGS. 10-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table determines the type of jackpot as "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", "2R regular jackpot", " This is a table that is referred to in order to determine either "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variable jackpot", or "10R probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", A ``10R probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 9%, a ``6R probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a 56% probability, and a ``6R regular jackpot'' is determined with a 35% probability. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", has a 10% probability of determining a "10R probability variable jackpot", a 50% probability of determining a "6R probability variation jackpot", a 5% probability of determining a "2R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% probability of " 2R Normal Jackpot”.

"10R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 10 rounds and then shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Moreover, the "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

"6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to be in a jackpot gaming state for 6 rounds, and then shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then controlled to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of a "10R definite strange jackpot", "6R sure strange jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot", a predetermined period (in this example, 30 seconds) passes in each round of the jackpot game. The grand prize opening is controlled to be open until a fixed number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and it is possible to enter a maximum of 10 winning holes in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R guaranteed strange jackpot" and "2R normal jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the jackpot game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the jackpot game ends, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state depending on the gaming state before the jackpot game and the jackpot type. The manner of transition of the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type determination table)
FIGS. 10-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table determines the type of small win as "small hit A" or "small hit B" based on the random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a small win symbol. ”, or “Small win C”.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(A), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", "Small win A" is determined with 100% probability. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6(B), in this feature part 052IW, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, is determined to be a "small win B" with a probability of 70%, and determined to be a "small win C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small win A", the special winning opening is opened for only an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small win game (see Figure 10-12), and the small win game There is almost no expectation that the game ball will enter the special prize opening. In addition, in the case of "small win B", the special winning hole is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Figure 10-13), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be expected to some extent. In addition, in the case of "small win C", the special winning hole is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Figure 10-14), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be most expected.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this characteristic portion 052IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is the second byte data of the production control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, there are nine types of first variation patterns #01 to #09 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. Thirty-four types, #01 to #34, are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the variation pattern #n (n=01-09 or 01-34) is used, it means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern for non-KT times shown in Figure 10-7 (A) A table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variable patterns #01 to #06 is determined.

When performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), the The first special symbol variation pattern table for the KT time shown in the table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, one of the first variable patterns #07 to #09 is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern for non-KT times shown in Figure 10-8 (C) A table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the second variable patterns #01 to #03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined that the winning pattern is a loss, the second fluctuation pattern #01 is determined, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when a small hit is determined, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when a jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a fairly long period of time, such as 5 minutes.

In this feature part 052IW, even in the non-KT state, if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation arises in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by landing the game ball in the special winning opening. I end up. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variable display is By reducing this, the frequency of occurrence of small hits is reduced, thereby preventing a situation where players are targeted to obtain prize balls due to small hits even though they are in a non-KT state. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the "occurrence frequency of small winnings" is, for example, the occurrence rate of small winnings per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, the frequency of small winnings per unit time. The rate of occurrence is higher than normal.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time will be changed even if it is a jackpot. By making the time period relatively long at 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally aiming for the prize ball by entering the special prize opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a jackpot, it is not necessary to take as long to digest the first retention memory as compared to the case of a small win, so the structure is configured so that the fluctuation time is shorter than in the case of a small win. There is.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in a low probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/first KT state will be terminated. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the first variation is to be displayed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/first KT time and first variation shown in Figure 10-8(D) is selected and the variation is changed. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(D), when the second special symbol is displayed as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06 is executed. determined.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #04, which is a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, is selected. It is determined. In addition, when determining a small win as the first variation in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #05 (second starting prize opening opening), which has a relatively long variation time of 7 seconds for a small win, Preparatory variation pattern) is determined. In this feature part 052IW, as already explained, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, it is actually possible to win a special variable prize. The special prize opening in the ball device 17 is set so that prizes are rarely won. However, in the state immediately after transitioning to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately released. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will enter the special winning hole. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds in the first variation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 17 are activated before shifting to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to open state after a sufficient period of time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in an open state to enable winning to the special winning opening. This prevents the occurrence of a situation where more prize balls than expected are obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when a jackpot is determined as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for two minutes.

Also, if you want to execute the 2nd to 49th variation display after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state, then The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low probability/first KT time and 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8(E), when the second special symbol is displayed as the second to 49th variations in the low probability/first KT state, the second variation patterns #07 to #13 are It will be decided either way. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), if it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability/1st KT state are unsuccessful, the second fluctuation pattern # of shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected. 07, or the second variation pattern #08, which is a shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second, may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. In addition, if a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #10 is a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or the variation pattern is even shorter with a variation time of 1 second. The second variation pattern #11 of the shortening variation may be determined. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability/first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #07 and #10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when no second reservation memory is stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #08 and #11 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reservation memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when This makes it possible to speed up the use of reserved memory and increase the operating rate. Furthermore, when determining a jackpot as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability/first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after completing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state, the 50th variation display (i.e., the final variation in the low probability/1st KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/1st KT time and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8(F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the second special symbol is displayed as the 50th variation in the low probability/1st KT state, any of the second variation patterns #14 to #16 determined.

In this feature section 052IW, when controlled to the low probability/first KT state, for example, text such as "Chance Time in progress" is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th change in the low probability/1st KT state is a loss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays text such as "Chance time is over!!" The second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 with an end display for performing the above is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when determining a jackpot as the 50th change in the low probability/1st KT state, the image display device 5 displays text such as "Chance time is over!!" The second variation pattern #16 is determined to include a predetermined resurrection display after the termination display.

In addition, in this feature section 052IW, as shown in Figure 10-7, if the first special symbol fluctuates and hits the jackpot during the KT state, the first fluctuating pattern #07 with a fluctuating time of 10 seconds is displayed. configured to make a decision. This is a case where a jackpot immediately occurs due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after transitioning to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is made to be a long fluctuation time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced miss, forced misses occur frequently despite the second KT state, and the player receives a small hit. You will not receive any benefit from it. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, by making the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol a short fluctuation time, the transition to the jackpot game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is made before forced misses occur frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike this feature part 052IW, even if the variation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first If the machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly missed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol's jackpot during the KT state. may be a long variable time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately after shifting to the second KT state due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is made the same short fluctuation time as the loss, the player You will not be able to receive any profits from small winnings. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol during the KT state is set to a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there will be enough time for the small hit to occur at least multiple times. (for example, 1 minute).

When performing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability/first KT state, the fluctuation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state A variation pattern table is selected depending on the number of times. In this case, if the first variation is to be displayed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/first KT time and first variation shown in Figure 10-9(G) is selected and the variation is changed. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #17 to #21 determined.

As with the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, as shown in Figure 10-9 (G), the variation time is also determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state The second variation pattern #17, which is a short variation of 5 seconds, may be determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #18 with reach may be determined. Furthermore, even when a small win is determined as the first fluctuation in the high probability/first KT state, the fluctuation pattern for preparing to open the second starting prize opening (second fluctuation pattern #19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when determining a jackpot as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

In addition, if the second and subsequent fluctuations are displayed after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state, the high probability shown in Figure 10-9 (H) is executed. A second special symbol variation pattern table for probability/first KT and after the second variation is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the second special symbol is displayed as a second variation or later in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28 is executed. Determined by

As with the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/1st KT state, as shown in Figure 10-9 (H), when determining that it is a failure after the 2nd fluctuation of the high probability/1st KT state, The second variation pattern #22 of a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #23 of a shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second variation or later in the high probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #25 with a short variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or the short variation pattern #25 with an even shorter variation time of 1 second. The second variation pattern #26 may be determined. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the second variation or later in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #22 and #25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when no second reservation memory is stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #23 and #26 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reservation memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when This makes it possible to speed up the use of reserved memory and increase the operating rate. In addition, when determining a jackpot after the second variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the high probability/second KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/second KT shown in Figure 10-9(I) is are selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, one of the second variable patterns #29 to #34 is determined. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-9 (I), when it is determined to be a failure in the high probability/second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #29 of shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the second variation pattern #30, which is a normal variation with a variation time of 5 seconds, is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a miss in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds may be determined, or the normal variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds. The second variation pattern #33 may be determined. Further, when determining a jackpot in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variable pattern, more specifically, it is determined whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is to be executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern, and which fluctuation pattern to use is determined. Figure 10-10 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high probability/second KT shown in Figure 10-9(I). It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a small hit variation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this feature part 052IW, when executing a variable display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, and when executing a variable display resulting in a small hit, , regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", the second fluctuation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second fluctuation pattern #33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of shortening variation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, a fluctuation pattern table in the case where the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability/second KT state is shown. The other fluctuation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each fluctuation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of the set value "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in Figures 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening change of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the first KT state, and a shortening change of 1.5 seconds is performed with high probability in the second KT state. Although the example is shown in which the configuration is configured to be executed in For example, it may be configured to perform a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second in the case of a low probability state, and to perform a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in the case of a high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be explained. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, using Figure 10-11 (1), special variable prize balls when controlled by jackpot games based on 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, and 2R probability variable jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as "probability variable jackpot") The opening pattern of the device 7 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the jackpot game starts, the solenoid 82 for the jackpot door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big jackpot) is opened. controlled by. When a game ball wins while the big prize opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

In addition, in a jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, as shown in Figure 10-11 (1), when the second game ball enters the jackpot in the first round, solenoid 052IW109 is driven and V The area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open, and the game ball can enter the V area 052IW104. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a predetermined number of wins (for example, 10) are detected in the first round, a special prize will be awarded as shown in Figure 10-11 (1). When the variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is controlled to be closed again, and the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

When a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 within a predetermined detection effective period, the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period starts at the timing when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to the open state, and the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is This is the period until a predetermined period (in this example, 500 ms) has elapsed after being controlled to the closed state again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), release of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as "normal jackpot") Explain patterns. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the jackpot game starts, the solenoid 82 for the jackpot door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big jackpot) is opened. controlled by. When a game ball wins while the big prize opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

In addition, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-11 (2), when the first game ball enters the jackpot in the first round, solenoid 052IW109 is driven, and V The area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open for a very short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, in the first round, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the big prize opening, a special prize will be awarded as shown in Figure 10-11 (2). The variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is controlled to be closed again, and the big winning hole is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period is after an extremely short opening period (in this example, 0.02 seconds) of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101. The period is set as a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing board 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball is likely to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is likely to be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11(2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is substantially difficult for the game ball to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, game balls enter the V area 052IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game than in the jackpot game based on normal jackpots.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be explained. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIGS. 10-12 shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Moreover, FIGS. 10-13 shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Moreover, FIGS. 10-14 shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. 10-12(1) to FIG. 10-14(1) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 10-12(2) ~FIG. 10-14 (2) shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be explained using FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays a normal Variable display of symbols is executed, and if it is determined that the symbol is a hit, the symbol that won is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined that the symbol is a loss, the symbol that is a loss is derived and displayed on the symbol display 20. be done. In this feature part 052IW, as shown in Figures 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol is determined to derive and display the winning symbol and the losing symbol. The time is assumed to be 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, the second starting winning hole is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable prize winning ball device 6B is kept open for 5.5 seconds, and game balls can be won in the second starting prize opening.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined to be a small hit, The small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, if it is a small winning A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). , in the case of small win B, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), and in the case of small win C, as shown in FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can enter the special winning opening (however, in the case of small win A, (Since the special variable winning ball device 17 is only open for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, you can hardly expect to win any prizes.) However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small wins are likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to enter the special winning slot (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In addition, in the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. This is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the next normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. be. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuations, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed, and the game ball is It is configured such that the time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. The variable winning ball device 6B is already open because it is shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the symbol is not changing normally. The game ball will reach the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, a game ball that passes through the passage gate 41 with no normal symbol variation is likely to win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be explained using FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays a normal Variable display of symbols is executed, and if it is determined to be a hit, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be a miss, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the regular symbol display 20. be done. In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in Figures 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 seconds, and the symbol is determined to derive and display the winning symbol and the losing symbol. The time is assumed to be 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in Figures 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning hole is opened. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is kept open for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined to be a small hit, The small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, if it is a small winning A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). , in the case of small win B, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), and in the case of small win C, as shown in FIG. As shown in -14(2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 1.8 seconds, and game balls can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closed period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of 2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second starting prize opening opening process is ensured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the open time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. Compared to the first KT state, it is easier for game balls to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and it is easier for game balls to enter the special winning hole. However, in the case of small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for only an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so even in the second KT state, it is hardly expected that the game ball will enter the special winning hole.

In addition, in the 2nd KT state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the special prize opening and it is easy to get a prize ball, so in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and when in the 2nd KT state, it is called "small hit RUSH". ” will be displayed.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is varied depending on which of the small winning types is the small winning A to C. Not limited to. For example, the number of openings of the special variable winning ball device 17 may be changed depending on which of the small winning types A to C is the small winning type. In this case, for example, in the case of small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is released only once during the small win game, whereas in the case of small win B or small win C, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small win game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. For example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, by opening the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole ) may be configured to provide a small winning type in which a certain amount of game balls can be won, and various embodiments can be considered. Further, in this example, a case is shown in which there are three types of small winnings, small winnings A to C, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Good too.

In addition, in the present feature part 052IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is It is configured such that the time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where no symbol fluctuation is normally performed. The game balls will reach the variable prize winning ball device 6B before being controlled. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for a game ball that passes through the passage gate 41 with no variation of the normal symbol to win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the normal symbol process processing by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). This is done by executing (see step S26). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state in the normal symbol process process of step S26. Regardless of whether there is a jackpot or a jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same in the first KT state and the second KT state, each 0.2 seconds, and the time before the second starting prize opening opening process is the same in the first KT state and the second KT state. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is varied by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the 2nd KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be different by making the fluctuation time and symbol confirmation time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning hole opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning hole opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be different by setting the variable winning ball device 6B. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winnings to the special winning hole in the first KT state. .

In this characteristic part 052IW, as will be described later, in the first KT state, the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set is set to control the high base state. As shown in 10-14(1), the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be open for a long time. In addition, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, the variable winning ball device 6B is released as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). Controlled to shorten the time.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, If the variable winning ball device 6B as shown in 14(1) is controlled with the first opening pattern (long opening) in which it is opened for a long time, and the special flag is not set, then The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) in which the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may be controlled not to be set in other states including the jackpot gaming state.

Further, even in the first KT state, when performing the last variable display in the low probability/first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the above-mentioned special flag may be configured to be erased in response to the 49th special symbol fluctuation stop among the 50 special symbol shortening fluctuation periods in the low probability/first KT state. With such a configuration, when the left-handed hit notification is performed after the low probability/first KT state ends, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is open long. be able to.

In addition, as mentioned above, when configuring the variable winning ball device 6B using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, it is also possible to use a flag for shortening variation of the variable display of the special symbol. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, if the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability/non-KT state (left-handed hitting state), it is only necessary to perform a firing operation for a few game balls. In this case, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability/non-KT state.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. For example, when the variable display of the second special symbol with a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, making it possible to capture the timing when the second special symbol stops fluctuating (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special winning hole becomes able to win). On the other hand, in this feature part 052IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbols, the variable winning ball device 6B is released after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the element of capture based on the firing operation aiming at the timing of occurrence of a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Production control command)
FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. This is a production control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a symbol variation pattern. Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the production control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5. Control.

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a loss. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 specification command (10R probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 specification command (6R probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variable pattern command is a 6R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command (6R normal jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 specification command (2R probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variable pattern command is a 2R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 specification command (2R normal jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a 2R normal jackpot. . Command 9007 (H) is a performance control command (display result 7 designation command (small win designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variable pattern command is a small win.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command received by the performance control CPU 120 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is It can be determined that the display result designation command is for the first special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display result Although the designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separate.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result specifying command, but instead corresponds to each of 10R probability variable jackpot/6R probability variation jackpot/6R normal jackpot/2R probability variation jackpot/2R normal jackpot/small hit/miss. A variation pattern command may be determined, and the production control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has ended. Command 9C01 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has started.

Command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command BXXX(H) (X=any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. Among them, B000(H) is a performance control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot game. B001(H) is a performance control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot game. B004(H) is a performance control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of a small win game. B005(H) is a performance control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of the small win game.

Command B1XX(H) is a production control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening. Command B401 (H) is a performance control command (special winning opening designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is a production control command (first effective starting winning designation command) that indicates that a game ball has won in the first starting winning opening in a state where the first pending storage number has not reached 4. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective starting winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the second starting winning opening in a state where the second pending storage number has not reached 4. Note that a command indicating the first pending memory number may be transmitted as the first valid starting prize designation command, and a command indicating the second pending memory number as the second valid starting prize designating command, but this feature section 052IW Here, the first valid starting winning designation command and the second valid starting winning designation command are commands indicating that there is a starting winning.

Command C801 (H) is a performance control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer waiting state) that specifies the first customer waiting state (a state in which the first special symbol has not changed and the first pending memory has not been stored). (Waiting demo display specification command). Command D001 (H) is a performance control command (second customer waiting state) that specifies a second customer waiting state (a state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second pending memory is not stored). (Waiting demo display specification command). Note that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be sent only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be sent only in the KT state.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is a low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/first KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/first KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/first KT state. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/second KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (setting command) that specifies the currently set setting value. Note that the setting value is set to "XX". For example, if the setting value is set to "1", command E100(H) is transmitted as the setting command. Further, for example, if the setting value is set to "6", command E105(H) is transmitted as the setting command.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 10-15 and FIG. 10-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the tone number data is output to the audio control board 13. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. Incidentally, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it is a state where the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first pending storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first pending storage counter is checked. If the first pending storage number is 0, a first customer waiting demo display designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first pending memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 and stores it in the RAM 102. (step 052IWS53A), decreases the value of the first pending memory number by 1 (subtracts the count value of the first pending memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area. (Step 052IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is converted to the first pending memory number = n-. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition for variable display is satisfied, so it is possible to specify the order in which each random value is extracted. In addition, in this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number are The extracted order is also stored in an identifiable manner.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the production control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). Note that in this example, a setting command is sent each time variable display is started by executing the process in step 052IWS55A, but the setting change process (processing to change the set value) is executed when the power is turned on. A configuration command is also sent when executed.

Note that the timing at which the setting command is sent is not limited to that shown in this example; for example, the setting command may be configured to be sent every time the fluctuating display ends, or the setting command may be sent during the fluctuating display. You can also configure it.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, if the variable probability flag and high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability/non-KT, and the low probability/non-KT background specification command is issued. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability/first KT and a low probability/first KT background specification command is issued, and if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the state is high probability/first KT. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, it is determined that the state is high probability/second KT and the high probability/second KT background specification command is issued. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing in jackpot (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating. If it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot change, the process moves to step 052IWS69A without performing the processes after step 052IWS58A. Thereby, when the first special symbol starts changing during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the system is configured to forcibly result in a loss regardless of whether or not the jackpot judgment value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly displacing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57A, a random number (fixed value) is set as the random number for determining the hit, and by moving to step 052IWS59A, when the starting prize is won, It may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Also, for example, when the second special symbol is fluctuating in the jackpot at step 052IWS57A, a random value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as the random number for hit determination without performing the processing at steps 052IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot when the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first jackpot flag indicating that it will be a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). . Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A Move to.

Further, if the jackpot is not determined in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small win (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small win flag indicating that it will be a small win based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 052IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the random number for determining the win type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small win type (step 052IWS68A). In addition, in this example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small win type is determined to be small win A (see FIG. 10-6(A)). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 052IWS69A), and if it is "0", the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0", step 052IWS75A is determined. Move to. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70A), It is determined whether the value has become "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process moves to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72A), and shortens the display of fluctuations in special symbols. The special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control is reset (step 052IWS73A). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the variation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS75A.

In this feature part 052IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed when the high probability is low at the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot. /High base state (low probability/first KT state) is controlled and fluctuation display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 052IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A and S73B, and a transition is made to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) continues the right-handed hitting notification and continues the right-handed hitting state, and although the high base state has ended as a gaming state, it shortens the fluctuation common to the first KT state. This flag is used to set the same performance background as the first KT state.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS74A and the process of step 052IWS74B, which will be described later, the high base state is established due to the start of variation of either the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display. When the final variation (in this example, the 50th variation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the variation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, does the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variable display) end? , or the start of the variable display of the other special symbol (in this example, the 51st variable display), the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variable shortening state is configured to end. This is desirable.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 052IWS75A.

In addition, in step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot using either the non-probability variable jackpot determination table or the probability variable jackpot determination table, taking into consideration the gaming state.

(First fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the special symbol time-saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is under control for shortening is set. (Step 052 IWS1700A). In addition, in this example, by setting the special symbol time saving flag and performing shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol, it becomes more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Figure 10-7 (see FIG. 10-9), small hits are likely to occur, so the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-standard figure shown in FIG. 10-7(A) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 052IWS1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for time (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 052IWS1701A and S1702A and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 will be used (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

Once the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 052IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer, and sets the fluctuation time At the same time as starting measurement of (step 052IWS1705A), variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 sends the determination result of whether or not to be a jackpot, and the jackpot type, if it has not been sent yet. Based on the determination result, any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the production control CPU 120. The IWS 1121A performs control to transmit data to the IWS 1121A (Step 052).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 052IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1122A). Step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1125A). In addition, whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, This can be determined by checking whether or not a second jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small win symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. This can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the small winning symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is immediately terminated.

If the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot (step 052IWS1127A). . It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether the first jackpot flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the process is ended as is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS1128A). It should be noted that whether or not it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process is immediately terminated.

When a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 052IWS1125A), or when a small win symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126A), either a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot. If the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, 6R normal jackpot) is in progress (Y in step 052IWS1127A, N in step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 causes the performance control CPU 120 to display the first forced symbol. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first jackpot flag or the first small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first jackpot flag or the first small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this characteristic section 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, or when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, If the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example) is in progress, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is This prevents a situation in which a jackpot or small hit occurs at the same time with the second special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the performance control CPU 120 side, if the first special symbol is forced to discontinue the fluctuation display, the decorative symbol will be changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command sent in step 052IWS1129A. Control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missing symbol as a display result.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, it is a probability variable jackpot (in this example, a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot). If the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, the first special symbol variation process is immediately terminated (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol is Based on the small win, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win release preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, the determination in step 052IWS1120A is N, the processing in steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer in step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit and the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a probability variable jackpot is being executed, the first variable time timer is activated during the small win game. The updating of is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit is executed, Even if there is, the first special symbol variation process is ended as is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is in progress, resulting in a loss or a small hit, the first fluctuation The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that was set (step 052IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-hand hitting indicator 26 (step 052IWS2012A), and performs control to transmit a right-hand hitting lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, when the gaming state is controlled to the KT state, the player who performs the right-hand hitting operation is advantageous to the player, and the right hit indicator 26 is lit. Therefore, in this example, the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit during the low probability/first KT state, but by executing the processing of steps 052IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B, the 50th fluctuation display is displayed. When starting, the low probability/first KT state is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processing of steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A, S2010B to S2013B is executed, thereby ending the 50th variation display. At this time, the right-hand hitting indicator 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In addition, in this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command was sent in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, the forced symbol will be sent as the stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of variation. A symbol that misses the target is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that a jackpot is to be started (step 052IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a jackpot game. , and the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit.

In addition, in this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game starts based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, so when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the right hit It may be configured to start lighting the indicator 26.

If the first jackpot flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027A.

In addition, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a small winning game. However, as already explained, when there is a small win in the variable display of the first special symbol, there is only a case where the small win type is small win A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to enter the special winning hole. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-hand hit display 26 is not turned on, and the right-hand hit lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027A).

In addition, in this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right-hitting notification that prompts the player to operate the game ball to the right of the gaming area. There is. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a firing promotion notification that urges the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 as a right hit notification. You can leave it there.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right hit notification and launch promotion notification will not be executed, and if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening in that state, the right hit notification and launch promotion notification will be issued. (In this case, since the game ball is waiting to pass through the gate, even if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening, the variable display of the first special symbol will not start immediately and will become the first pending memory). It may be configured as follows.

Conversely, when the passing of a game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the recognition level is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Accordingly, it may be configured to provide a left-handed hit notification to the player to urge the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area. On the other hand, when a winning of a game ball in the second start winning hole or special winning hole is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the recognition level is high (for example, loud sound output or The configuration may be such that the player is notified of the left-handed hit using a large screen display. With such a configuration, accurate firing notification can be performed. In particular, with the above configuration, for a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right of the gaming area, a slight left-handed notification is sent to the player in a manner in which the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, it may be configured such that the left-handed player is notified in a manner that increases the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation can be prompted by a clerk at the game parlor to return to a left-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, it may be configured such that a left-handed hit notification is performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second start winning hole, or the special winning hole reaches a certain number. In addition, at the passage gate 41, if a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is issued, and at the second starting prize opening or special prize opening, the number of game balls is It may also be configured such that the left-handed hit notification is performed when a small specific number (for example, one) or more game balls are detected.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is met, but when the demonstration display is performed in the normal state, the entry to the passing gate 41, the second starting prize opening, or the special winning opening. When it is detected that a winning game ball has been won, the execution of the demonstration display that was being executed may be terminated and the left-handed hit notification may be performed.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second pending storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second pending storage counter is checked. If the second pending storage number is 0, a second customer waiting demo display designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second pending memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. (step 052IWS53B), decreases the value of the second pending memory number by 1 (subtracts the count value of the second pending memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area. (Step 052IWS54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is converted to the second pending memory number = n - Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition for variable display is satisfied, so it is possible to specify the order in which each random number value is extracted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the production control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). Note that in this example, a setting command is sent each time variable display is started by executing the process in step 052IWS55B, but the setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is executed when the power is turned on. A configuration command is also sent when executed.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). In addition, the specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 052IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing in jackpot (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating. If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing, the process moves to step 052IWS69B without performing the processes after step 052IWS58B. As a result, when the second special symbol starts varying during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the system is configured such that the jackpot is forcibly missed regardless of whether the jackpot determination value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly causing the disc to be removed is not limited to the method described above. For example, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57B, a random value (fixed value) of the loss is set as the random number for determining the hit, and by moving to step 052IWS59B, it is possible to It may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of whether a random number for determining a hit has been obtained.

For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57B, a random value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as the random number for hit determination without performing the processing in steps 052IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot when the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that it will be a jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). . Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63B). ), the process moves to step 052 IWS69B.

Further, if the jackpot is not determined in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that it will be a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 052IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the random number for determining the win type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small win type (step 052IWS68B). In addition, in this example, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small win type is determined to be small win B or small win C (see FIG. 10-6(B)). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", it moves to step 052IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70B), It is determined whether the value has become "0" (step 052IWS71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process moves to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the display of fluctuations in special symbols. The special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 052IWS75B.

In addition, in step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot using either the non-probability variable jackpot determination table or the probability variable jackpot determination table, taking into consideration the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is similar to the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process has been explained. However, in the second fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as step 052IWS1700A, and checks whether the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-standard figure shown in FIG. 10-8(C) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes the fluctuation according to whether the probability fluctuation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, select one of the second special symbol variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8(D) to 10-9(I). For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 10-8 (D) If it is the 2nd to 49th variation, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 10-8 (E), and if it is the 50th variation, select the second variation pattern table shown in Figure 10-8 (F). Select the special symbol variation pattern table. For example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation shown in Figure 10-9 (G) Select a pattern table, and if it is the second variation or later, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (H). Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9(I) is selected.

(Second special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 sends the determination result of whether or not to be a jackpot, and the jackpot type, if it has not been sent yet. Based on the decision result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specification command, display result 2 specification command, display result 3 specification command, display result 5 specification command, display result 6 specification command, display result 7 specification command) is controlled to be transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), performs control to send a second symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1122B). Step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1125B). In addition, whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing, and This can be determined by checking whether or not the first jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small win symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. This can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol. If the small winning symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is immediately terminated.

If the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the fluctuating display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot (step 052IWS1127B). . It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the second jackpot flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the process is immediately terminated.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS1128B). . It should be noted that whether or not it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process ends immediately.

When a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 052IWS1125B), or when a small win symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126B), 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and If the variable display of the second special symbol that does not result in any of the 2R guaranteed variable jackpots (that is, the 2R normal jackpot) is in progress (Y in step 052IWS1127B, N in step 052IWS1128B), the CPU 103 controls the performance control CPU 120. Control is performed to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in this case, if the second jackpot flag or the second small jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second jackpot flag or the second small jackpot flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature part 052IW, when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot while the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is being executed, or when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit. If the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, 2R normal jackpot) is in progress, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is This prevents a situation in which a jackpot or small hit occurs at the same time with the second special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the production control CPU 120 side, if the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed, the variation of the decorative symbol will be changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command sent in step 052IWS1129B. Control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missing symbol as a display result.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, a probability variable jackpot (in this example, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, If the second special symbol variation display is in progress, resulting in a 2R guaranteed strange jackpot), the second special symbol variation process is ended (see Y in step 052 IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol Based on the symbol fluctuation display becoming a small win, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win release preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, the determination in step 052IWS1120B is N, the processing in steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer in step 052IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a probability variable jackpot is being executed, the second variable time timer is activated during the small win game. The update is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and updating of the second variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, and while the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a loss or a small hit, Even if there is, the second special symbol variation process is ended as is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol is in progress, resulting in a loss or a small hit, the second variable The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, the remaining second pending memory can be used in the normal state after the first KT state (after the time saving state has ended), and a jackpot can occur at an unintended timing when the player is not present. can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning hole), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol ( In a gaming machine configured to have a starting prize opening (not a variable winning ball device) and configured to transition to the normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) , a configuration may be applied in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed as described above. In this case, as the fluctuating efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol also increases, but along with this, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is forced to miss. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a variable display of the second special symbol based on the second pending memory in the normal state by increasing the frequency of occurrence of a jackpot at an unintended timing when the player is not present. I can do it.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012B), and controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In addition, in this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command was sent in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol fluctuation process, the command will be forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol, regardless of the determination result at the start of fluctuation. A symbol that misses the target is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a jackpot game. , and the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit.

If the second jackpot flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small win flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special figure time-saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hand display 26 (step 052 IWS2024B), and also controls the production control CPU 120 to Control is performed to transmit a lighting start designation command (step 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, lighting of the right hit indicator 26 is started. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is better for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a small winning game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

However, in this example, even if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 should already be lit if the player is in the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process in step 052IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right hit indicator 26 starts to light up redundantly. It is configured not to perform processing such as sending a right-handed lighting start designation command.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027B).

(Accessories control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing the accessory control normal processing (step S120) in the accessory control process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before jackpot opening (step 052IWS2103), sets opening pattern data for round 1 according to the jackpot type (step 052IWS2104), and sets "1" to the round number counter indicating the number of jackpot rounds. ” (Step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 checks whether a detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 052IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the process ends immediately. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, high base flag, and special map time saving flag, if set, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( Step 052IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 052IWS2504).

In this characteristic part 052IW, by executing the gate passing waiting process, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, but the passing gate 41 is played. The game is configured to proceed to a jackpot game on the condition that a ball passes through and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether the first count switch 23 is in the on state (step 052IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 determines the winning number for counting the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening. The value of the counter is incremented by 1 (step 052 IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a large winning opening winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the V area switch 052IW106 is in the on state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is in the on state, that is, if a game ball entering the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the winning prize counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning prize counter is 10, the process moves to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the prize winning counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big prize opening (step 052 IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not (Step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends immediately.

If the value of the prize winning counter is 10 (Y in step 052IWS2406) or if the open time timer times out (Y in step 052IWS2408), the CPU 103 controls the drive of the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. The game is stopped and the big prize opening is controlled to be closed (step 052IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after opening the big winning hole to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step 052 IWS2412).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process moves to step 052IWS2202. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time). The value is set (step 052 IWS2201) and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2203). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the variable probability flag, and shifts to the variable probability state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS2207). In addition, whether it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2215. In addition, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the high probability/low base state (high probability probability/second KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variable jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2209). In addition, whether or not it is a 6R probability variable jackpot can be determined by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2210), further sets the special symbol time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2211). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R variable jackpot, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In addition, in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when starting the jackpot game (see step 052 IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display, It is determined as Y in step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 052IWS70A and step 052IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

If it is not a 6R definite strange jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052 IWS2212), and also sets the special symbol time saving flag. and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50" (step 052IWS2214). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it will be controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2215).

(Small winning end processing)
FIG. 10-28 is a flowchart showing the small winning end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, the process moves to step 052IWS2302. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to a display corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 052 IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small winning end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2303). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2303), the CPU 103 checks whether the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right hit indicator 26 is lit (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed player indicator 26 is lit, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed player indicator 26 (step 052 IWS2306), and transmits a right-handed player lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up at the start of the small win game (steps 052IWS2023B to S2025B). By executing the processing in steps 052IWS2304 to S2307, the lighting of the right-hand hit indicator 26 ends at the end of the small winning game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of gaming state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in this feature section 052IW will be explained. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state changes in this feature section 052IW. First, in this feature part 052IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a firing operation (left-handed hit) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the gaming area. Therefore, in the normal state, starting winnings to the first starting winning hole mainly occur, and a variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Furthermore, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability/low probability/low probability jackpot after the jackpot game ends. The state shifts to a low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability/high base state (high probability/ The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052 IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) and the next jackpot will occur. The low probability/high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability/high base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/low base state), this feature section 052IW allows the player to aim at the right side of the gaming area. to launch the game ball (hitting to the right). Therefore, in the KT state, starting winnings to the second starting winning hole mainly occur, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Furthermore, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in Figure 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052, IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. /Transfers to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the total probability of a 6R variable jackpot is 50% (see Figure 10-5), so once the high probability/high When it comes to the base state, the high probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 50%. In addition, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), it will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuating displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in Figure 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052, IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. /Transfers to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the system will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuating displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In addition, in this feature part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see Figures 10-5 (D) and (E)), Once the low probability/high base state is reached, the low probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 35%. In addition, after a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and becomes a low probability/high base state, if the next jackpot does not occur and the fluctuating display ends 50 times, as shown in Figure 10-29. As shown, the state shifts to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 052IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in Figure 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052, IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot is 15. % (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state will loop at a rate of 15%. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability will be reached after the jackpot game ends. /Transfers to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/2nd KT state), the system will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuating displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the first special symbol is displayed fluctuating in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is explained, but the second special symbol is fluctuating at a low rate. It is also possible that the display will be executed. In this case, if a 10R variable jackpot or a 2R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will shift to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). become. In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), but the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), but the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained where the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), but the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal pattern process processing)
Next, the normal symbol process processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be explained. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process process, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 052IWS5111), Control is performed to transmit a gate passage designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passage process (step 052IWS5113).

In this feature section 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays the role of an operating area, but is it in a gate passage waiting state after stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol and before starting the jackpot game? Regardless of whether or not the gate passage designation command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 depending on the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, regardless of whether or not the game is in the gate passage waiting state, if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passage process in step 052IWS5113 is executed. Normally, a variable display of symbols is executed, but the display is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when the game ball is not in the waiting state to pass through the gate, a variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and in the waiting state to pass through the gate, even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol is displayed. The configuration may be such that the variable display is not performed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the passage gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed within the timer interrupt processing. Since it is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), after the process of detecting the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the activation area is performed, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the normal starting area is detected. Detection processing is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 052 IWS5113): The CPU 103 determines that the count value (gate passage memory number) of the gate passage memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41) is the maximum value (in this example, " 4)). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by 1. In addition, the LED of the ordinary card reservation display 25C is lit according to the value of the gate passage memory counter. Then, the CPU 103 extracts the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, and performs processing to store it in a storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the gate passing memory number.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where it is possible to start changing the normal symbol (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 052IWS5100, specifically, when the normal symbol If the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner on the display 20 and the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the process of opening or closing based on the symbol being derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20), the gate passing memory is Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is checked. If the number of gate passing memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not it is a hit (whether or not a stop symbol of a normal symbol is to be a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set in the normal symbol process timer and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 052 IWS5101): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 052 IWS5102): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a losing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052 IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory release pre-release time is set in the normal symbol process timer and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 052IWS5103).

Normal electric accessory opening pre-processing (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric accessory operating time to the ordinary symbol process timer, and is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory actuation process (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory activation process (Step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step 052 IWS5121), the process is immediately terminated. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the random number value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1 (step 052IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the gate passing storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is transferred to the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memories = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of gate passage memories are extracted is always in the order of gate passage memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's supposed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses the normal symbol determination table to determine whether or not to win a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on random numbers (random numbers for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol). (Step 052IWS5127). In addition, in this feature part 052IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly performs 99/100 regardless of whether it is in the variable probability state, whether it is in the KT state, or whether it is in the high base state. It is decided that the probability will be a normal symbol hit.

In step 052IWS5127, if the read random number value for normal symbol hit determination is within the winning range (if it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the winning symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5128), and moves to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, if the read random number value for normal symbol hit determination is not within the winning range (if it is a loss), the CPU 103 sets a loss symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and moves to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the normal symbol process timer to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time (Y, S5131 of step 052IWS5130). Further, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N of step 052 IWS5130, S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal pattern stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the normal symbol process timer by 1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS3702), the process ends as is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 052IWS5127 if the symbol is a winning symbol). (Step 052IWS3703) In addition, whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol can be confirmed by setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and checking whether that flag is set. I can do it.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a miss symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 changes the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory is released (step 052IWS3706). In addition, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the release of the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). .

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "3") corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707).

(Normal electric accessory release pre-processing)
FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory release preprocessing (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts -1 from the value of the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS3802), the process ends as is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before the normal electric accessory is released has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , if it is set, that is, in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 052IWS3805). In addition, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

In this way, in this characteristic part 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is a state in which it is easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning hole than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is more difficult to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

In addition, when the gaming state is the first KT state, the control method for making it easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning hole is not limited to the one shown in this characteristic part 052IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of openings of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to one time, whereas in the first KT state, the number of openings of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to two times. By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to make it easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning opening.

For example, in the case of the first KT state, compared to the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B may be controlled to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above. It may also be executed in combination with control to increase the number of openings.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to an open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "4") corresponding to the normal electric accessory activation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS612). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 052 IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received production control command is a setting command (step 052IWS614), the production control CPU 0120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS615). .

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 052IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617). Then, the variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS618).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 052IWS619), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620). ).

If the received production control command is any of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 052 IWS621 ), the production control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 052IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received performance control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS623), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the right hit display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).

If the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 052IWS626), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to end the right hit display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS624 and S627, a right hit display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right hit display displayed during the jackpot game, it may be configured to perform a setting value suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value. For example, when starting the right-handed display in step 052 IWS624, normally the right-handed display with white display color is started, but if it is decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect, the setting value is "1". If the setting value is "2", right-handed display with a blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "2", right-handed display with a green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , when the setting value is "3", the yellow display color starts to be displayed on the right at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the orange display color starts to be displayed on the right at a relatively high rate. If the setting value is ``5'', the right-handed hitting display with red display color will start, and if the setting value is ``6'', the right-handed hitting display will start at a relatively high rate. A right-handed display with rainbow display colors may be started.

Also, for example, the right-handed display may be configured to continue to be displayed during the KT state after the end of the jackpot game, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display may be changed and set at the timing of the end of the jackpot game. It may be configured to execute a value suggestion performance.

Furthermore, for example, when transitioning to the normal state (low probability/low base state) after completing 50 fluctuation displays in the low probability/first KT state, the left-handed display may be started; The setting value suggestion performance may be performed by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the display. It is only necessary to configure the setting value suggestion performance to be executable when the control of the gaming state is switched in some form in this way.

If the received production control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS629), the production control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received performance control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS631), the performance control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a big winning hole opening display command (step 052 IWS633), the performance control CPU 120 outputs a winning number for counting the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole during the round of the jackpot game. The counter value is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS634). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a grand prize opening flag that specifies that the grand prize opening is open (during the round period during the jackpot game) (step 052IWS635).

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the big winning opening opening display command (timing of starting a round), so it is extremely rare. Even if an over-win is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the number-of-wins counter.

If the received production control command is a display command after the opening of the grand prize opening (step 052IWS636), the production control CPU 120 sets a post-opening flag of the grand prize opening which specifies that it is the interval period after the opening of the grand prize opening. (Step 052IWS637).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052IWS640), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low probability/non-KT background designation command (step 052IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (for example, A blue background image) is displayed (step 052IWS643). Further, if set, the performance control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 052IWS644). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform an award for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole and special winning hole during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state. If the ball number counter is set, the value of the prize ball number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game (excluding jackpot games based on 2R definite jackpot and 2R normal jackpot), or a game ball enters the special jackpot during the high probability/second KT state. When a ball wins a prize, the value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated (see steps 052IWS660, S667), but by executing the process of step 052IWS645, the game state changes to low probability/low probability/ After entering the high base state (low probability/first KT state), the value of the prize ball number counter is cleared to 0 when the 50 fluctuating displays are completed and the state becomes low probability/low base state.

If the received effect control command is a low probability/first KT background specification command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/first KT state (for example, A green background image) is displayed (step 052IWS647). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in a high probability state or the high probability state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. 2KT status flag is reset (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/first KT background designation command (step 052IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, A yellow background image) is displayed (step 052IWS651). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/second KT background designation command (step 052IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (for example, A red background image) is displayed (step 052IWS655). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS657).

If the received production control command is a big winning opening prize designation command (step 052 IWS658), the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot game based on a 10R probability-variable jackpot, a 6R probability-variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is in progress. (Step 052IWS659). In addition, whether or not a jackpot game based on a 10R definite strange jackpot, a 6R definite strange jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is in progress can be determined, for example, by determining whether the value of the performance control process flag is from the jackpot performance process (step S176) to the ending performance process (step S177). ), and also check whether the display result specification commands stored in the display result specification command storage area are display result 2 specification commands to display result 4 specification commands. It can be determined by

If a jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot is in progress, the performance control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 052IWS660). Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after addition (step 052IWS661). Note that the prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole and special winning hole during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS658 to S661, in this example, the prize ball is awarded based on the occurrence of a prize in the jackpot during the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot. The value of the number counter and the display of the number of prize balls are updated. On the other hand, even during a jackpot game, if a prize is entered into the jackpot during a jackpot game based on a 2R guaranteed variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the value of the prize ball counter will not be updated, and the prize ball number counter will not be updated. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes an over winning suggestion performance process for determining and executing an over winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS662). In addition, the "suggestion performance when over-winning" is a performance that is executed at the timing when an over-winning into the big winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set setting value.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number display suggestion production process for determining and executing the prize ball number display suggestion production (step 052IWS663). In addition, the "prize ball number display suggestion effect" is a predetermined cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole or special winning hole during jackpot games or high probability / 2nd KT state. This effect is executed at the timing when the number (in this example, 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, and indicates the currently set setting value.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a prize pitch number emphasizing production process for determining and executing a prize pitch number emphasizing production (step 052IWS664). In addition, the "prize ball number emphasizing production" is a predetermined number of accumulated number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole or special winning hole during jackpot games or high probability / 2nd KT state. (In this example, this is an effect that emphasizes that the number of pieces has reached 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces, 3000 pieces, 4000 pieces, and 5000 pieces).

If the received performance control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS665), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the second KT status flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the high probability/second KT state), the performance control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 052IWS667). Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS665 to S668, in this example, the value of the prize ball number counter and the prize ball are calculated based on the fact that a small hit occurred during the high probability/second KT state and a prize was entered into the special winning hole. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even if the ball is in the KT state, if a special winning occurs during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, the value of the prize ball number counter will not be updated. The prize ball number display is also not updated (however, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball number counter is not reset).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a small hit winning suggestion performance process for determining and executing the small winning winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS669). In addition, the "Suggestion performance when winning a small hit" is a performance that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / 2nd KT state and a prize is entered into the special prize opening, and it is a performance that suggests the currently set setting value. .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 moves to step 052IWS663 and executes a prize ball number display suggestion performance process (step 052IWS663). Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number emphasizing performance process (step 052IWS664).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 executes processing such as storing the received production control command or setting a flag according to the received production control command (step 052 IWS670 ). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS611.

(Suggestive effect processing when over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the over winning suggestion production process (step 052 IWS662). In the excessive winning suggestion performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the number of winnings counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning into the big winning opening has occurred), the production control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of the over-winning suggestion production. A lottery process based on random numbers is performed using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table to determine the presence or absence and type of over-winning suggestion effect (step 052 IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the over-winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 10-39, the over-winning suggestion performance determination table includes no over-winning suggestion performance, over-winning suggestion A, over-winning suggestion B, over-winning suggestion C, and over-winning suggestion performance C. Judgment values are assigned to each of the suggestion performance D, the over-winning suggestion performance E, and the over-winning suggestion performance F.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the winning display (in this example, “+15 " character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-39, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L , 8R outputs the winning sound of sound A, which is different from the normal sound. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in green on the image display device 5, and the winning sound B, which is different from the normal sound, is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect C" is executed, a winning display is displayed in yellow on the image display device 5, and a winning sound C different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and the winning sound D, which is different from the normal sound, is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect E" is executed, a winning display is displayed in red on the image display device 5, and a winning sound E different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect F" is executed, a winning display is displayed in rainbow colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, different determination values are assigned to the over winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the setting values "1" to "6" the current setting value is. In step 052IWS303, the performance control CPU 120 checks the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the over-winning suggestion performance are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the percentage of execution of the over winning suggestion performance A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the setting value is "2", the proportion of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect B being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the percentage of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the percentage of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect D being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the setting value is "5", the proportion of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect E is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the proportion of execution of the over winning suggestion effect F is determined to be relatively high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the ratio for determining the execution of the over winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over winning suggestion effects A to F, is: 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, if the setting value is "2", it is 45%, if the setting value is "3", it is 50%, and the setting value When the setting value is "4", it is 55%, when the setting value is "5", it is 60%, and when the setting value is "6", it is 65%. In this way, in this example, since over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the proportion of decisions to execute the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high compared to the small hit winning suggestion effect described later. There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS303 to execute the over winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS304). If it has been decided to execute the over-winning suggestion effect, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect (step 052 IWS305). . For example, if it is decided to execute the over-winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to display a winning display in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the determined type of over winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the over-winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to output the winning sound of sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052 IWS302), or if it is determined that there will be no suggestion effect at the time of over winning (N in step 052 IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 In step 052, IWS307, the winning display is controlled to be displayed in the normal display color (in this example, white). Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestive performance processing when winning a small hit)
FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart showing the small hit winning suggestion production process (step 052IWS669). In the small hit winning suggestion performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the small hit winning suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence or absence and type of the small winning winning suggestion performance. The presence/absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit are determined (step 052IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 10-41, the small hit winning suggestion performance determination table includes: no small hit winning suggestion performance, small winning winning suggestion performance A, small winning winning suggestion performance B, and small winning winning suggestion performance. Judgment values are assigned to C, small hit winning suggestion performance D, small winning winning suggestion performance E, and small winning winning suggestion performance F, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when a game ball wins in the special winning hole, the winning display (in this example, "+10 " character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-41, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the speaker The winning sound of sound A, which is different from the normal sound, is output from 8L and 8R. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect B" is executed, a winning display is displayed in green on the image display device 5, and a sound B different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect C" is executed, a winning display is displayed in yellow on the image display device 5, and a sound C different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, a winning display is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and a sound D different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect E" is executed, a winning display is displayed in red on the image display device 5, and a sound E different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, a winning display is displayed in rainbow colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound will be output.

As shown in Figure 10-41, different judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on whether the current setting value is from ``1'' to ``6''. . In step 052IWS321, the performance control CPU 120 checks the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion performance are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the percentage of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance B is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance C is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the percentage of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance D being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance E is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance F is relatively high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, if the setting value is "1", the ratio for determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance, which is the sum of the small winning winning suggestion performances A to F. is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, when the setting value is "2", it is 6%, when the setting value is "3", it is 7%, and when the setting value is "4", it is 6%. ”, it is 8%, when the setting value is “5”, it is 9%, and when the setting value is “6”, it is 10%. In this way, in this example, the proportion of decisions to execute the small hit winning suggestion presentation is relatively low compared to the over winning suggestion presentation described above.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS321 to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS322). If it has been decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display according to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS323). For example, if it is decided to execute the small winning winning suggestion performance A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a winning display in a blue display color. Further, the performance control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output a winning sound according to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to output the winning sound of sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there will be no suggestion presentation when winning a small hit (N in step 052 IWS322), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a winning indication in the normal display color (in this example, white) on the image display device 5. (Step 052 IWS325). Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS326).

In addition, the reliability of the set value suggestion may be made different depending on when the over-winning suggestion performance is executed and when the small winning suggestion presentation is executed. For example, although over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any setting value of ``1'' to ``6'', it is executed at a relatively high rate when the setting value is ``6''. It may be configured such that if the winning suggestion effect F is executed, the set value is determined to be "6". Conversely, for example, the small winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any setting value of "1" to "6", but it is executed at a relatively high rate when the setting value is "6". On the other hand, the setting value may be determined to be "6" if the over-winning suggestion effect F is executed.

In addition, in this example, for the over-winning suggestion effect and the small winning suggestion effect, the display format of the winning display (in this example, the display color) is different from normal, and a winning sound different from normal is output. Although the case where execution is carried out according to the mode has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, by making either the display mode of the winning display (display color in this example) or the winning sound different from the usual mode, an over-winning suggestion effect or a small winning award suggestion effect can be executed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, for example, by displaying an effect display or changing the display color of lamps or LEDs at the timing of an over-winning or a winning in a special winning opening, it is possible to create a suggestion for over-winning or to win a small hit. It may be configured to execute a time-suggesting effect.

(Prize ball count display suggestion processing)
FIG. 10-42 is a flowchart showing the award ball count display suggestion production process (step 052IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion production process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 for the first time (step 052IWS341). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS341, If the value of the prize ball number counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS342). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "4" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "4" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table for determining whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance, and draws a lottery based on random numbers. Processing is performed to determine whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 052IWS343). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the award ball count display suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when prize pitch display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "4" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion performance A is determined with a probability of 3%. In addition, in this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, at least the set value "4" is executed. It is confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS341), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 555 for the first time ( Step 052IWS344). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS344, If the value of the prize ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 555 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 555 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS345). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "5" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance B. (Step 052IWS346). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when award ball count display suggestion effect B is executed, characters such as "555 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "5" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of prize pitch number display suggestion performance B is determined with a probability of 2%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" is executed. It is confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 555 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS344), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 for the first time ( Step 052IWS347). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS347, If the value of the prize ball number counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 666 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS348). It should be noted that whether or not the current setting value is the setting value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "6", the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the presence or absence of the prize pitch number display suggestion production C. Determine (step 052IWS349). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, characters such as "666 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "6". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the award ball number display suggestion performance C is determined with a probability of 1%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the setting value is "6", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the setting value is "6". One thing is certain.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS347), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2456 for the first time ( Step 052IWS350). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS350, the production control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2460 or 2465, the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2456 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS351). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "4" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "4" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance D. (Step 052 IWS352). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize pitch display suggestion effect D is executed, a character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "4" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is equal to or higher than the set value "4", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, the set value "4" is executed. The above is confirmed.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2456 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS350), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2555 for the first time ( Step 052IWS353). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS353, the performance control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2555 or 2560, the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2555 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS354). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "5" or more, the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize pitch number display suggestion production E. (Step 052IWS355). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the award ball count display suggestion effect E is executed, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "5" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In addition, in this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, the set value ``5'' is executed. The above is confirmed.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2555 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS353), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2666 for the first time ( Step 052IWS356). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS356, the performance control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2670 or 2675, the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2666 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS357). It should be noted that whether or not the current setting value is the setting value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "6", the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the presence or absence of the prize pitch number display suggestion production F. Determine (step 052IWS358). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize pitch display suggestion effect F is executed, characters such as "2666 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "6". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the setting value is "6", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, the setting value is "6". One thing is certain.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion performance in steps 052IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, and S358 (step 052IWS359). If it has been decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion performance (step 052IWS360). For example, if it is decided to execute the award ball count display suggestion performance A, control is performed to display characters such as "456 OVER" on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, looking at the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the jackpot game, the period during the jackpot game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As the game progresses, the execution probability of the prize pitch display suggestion effect becomes lower to 3%, 2%, and 1%. 6” The accuracy of confirmation and setting value suggestion has increased. In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-43, if you look at the prize ball number display suggestion effects D to F that are executed during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), during the small hit RUSH As the period becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, but if the set value is ``4'' or higher, the set value The accuracy of confirming "5" or more, confirming the set value "6", and suggesting the set value is increasing.

Note that the mode is not limited to the mode shown in this example, but for example, as the period during the jackpot game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect increases. It may be configured as desired. Further, for example, as the period during the jackpot game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of the setting value suggestion may be lowered.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, there are prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C that are executed during the jackpot game, and prize ball number display suggestions that are executed during the small hit RUSH period. Productions D to F show a case where the execution probabilities of the award pitch display suggestion production are different, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. It's okay.

(Processing to emphasize the number of prize pitches)
FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the prize pitch number emphasizing process (step 052IWS664). In the prize pitch number emphasizing production processing, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the value of the prize pitch number counter reaches a threshold value of 1000 (in this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000) for the first time. (Step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS371, For example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 1000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 3000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 4000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 5000 for the first time.

If the value of the prize pitch number counter reaches the threshold of every 1000 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 uses a prize pitch number emphasizing performance determination table for determining whether or not to perform a prize pitch number emphasizing performance, and generates a random number. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not there will be an emphasis on the number of prize pitches (step 052 IWS372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-45, in this example, if the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000, execution of prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, characters such as "1000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 3000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed, characters such as "3000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 4000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, characters such as "4000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 5000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed, characters such as "5000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS372 to execute the prize ball number emphasizing performance (step 052IWS373). If it has been decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing performance (step 052IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display characters such as "1000 OVER".

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls emphasis effect can be executed when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000, but such It is not limited to the form. For example, it is not necessary to make it possible to perform the performance to emphasize the number of prize balls in all of these cases, but to make it possible to perform the performance to emphasize the number of prize balls when the number of prize balls reaches 1,000, 2,000, and 3,000. may be configured. Further, for example, the system may be configured to be able to perform a presentation that emphasizes the number of prize balls even when the number of prize balls reaches 6,000 or 7,000, and various embodiments are possible.

As shown in Figures 10-44 and 10-45, the prize pitch count emphasizing performance is different from the prize pitch count display suggestion performance shown in Figures 10-42 and 10-43, and is unrelated to the current setting value. It is a performance that is decided and executed. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and may be configured to be able to execute the prize pitch number emphasizing performance in a manner that suggests the current setting value, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize pitch number emphasizing performance. For example, the present setting value may be suggested by displaying characters such as "1000 OVER" or "2000 OVER" in a different display color than usual.

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variable pattern command has been received (step 052IWS811). Note that whether or not a variation pattern command has been received can be determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that a variation pattern command has been received in the command analysis process (step S75) when a variation pattern command is received. Then, in step 052IWS811, it may be checked whether the variable pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. (Step 052IWS813). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol depends on, for example, whether the variable pattern indicated by the received variable pattern command specifies the first variable pattern #01 to #09. This can be determined by checking whether If it is not the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed), the process is ended as is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step 052IWS814). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the second special symbol depends on, for example, whether the variable pattern indicated by the received variable pattern command specifies the second variable pattern #01 to #34. This can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the second special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is ended as is. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When this is executed and the state is KT, a variable display of decorative symbols is executed on the image display device 5 in response to a variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is in the KT state, or even when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is in the non-KT state. , the variable display of decorative patterns is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS920). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol depends on whether, for example, the variable pattern command stored in the variable pattern command storage area specifies the first variable pattern #01 to #09. This can be determined by checking whether or not it exists. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current variable display is a small hit (step 052IWS921). In addition, to determine whether the current variable display is a small hit, for example, check whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. This can be determined by If it is a small hit variation, the production control CPU 120 determines a non-reach symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 052IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it becomes a small win, there is only a case where the small win is A. I can hardly expect to win any prizes. Therefore, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS920 to S922, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents players from having excessive expectations.

When performing a variable display of the second special symbol (N in step 052IWS920) or when there is no small hit variation (N in step 052IWS921), the performance control CPU 120 displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result. is determined (step 052IWS923). In step 052IWS923, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined that the display result 1 is a miss), the performance control CPU 120 determines that the left center right decorative pattern is a completely mismatched missed symbol or only the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. The matched reach determines the combination of missing symbols. In addition, when a display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 10R probability-variable jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left center right are "7" among the odd symbols is determined. Further, when a display result 3 designation command is received (when a 6R probability-variable jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left-center right decorative symbols are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined. In addition, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that it is a 2R probability-variable jackpot), the combination of symbols in which the decorative symbol inside includes a special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. . In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (if it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left center right are even numbers. Determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined that a small win is achieved), a combination of decorative symbols of the small win symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variable display is a failure (Step 052IWS924). To determine whether or not the current variable display is a failure, for example, check whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. It can be determined by If there is no deviation variation, the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 052 IWS924), the performance control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggestion effect setting process to determine the presence or absence and type of a setting value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 052IWS925).

In step 052IWS925, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the performance control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence/absence and type of setting value suggestion performance. Determine the presence or absence and type of value suggestion performance.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 10-48, the setting value suggestion effect determination table includes no setting value suggestion effect, setting value suggestion effect A, setting value suggestion effect B, setting value suggestion effect C, setting value suggestion effect D, and setting value. Judgment values are assigned to each of the suggestion effect E and the setting value suggestion effect F.

The setting value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. The execution rate is highest in certain cases. Further, the setting value suggestion performance B is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined character image in green display color on the image display device 5, for example, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect C is an effect executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect E is an effect executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-48, the setting value `` 6", the execution rate is highest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the second KT status flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the second KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 052IWS926), that is, if it is the second KT state, the performance control CPU 120 will send a small win RUSH indicating that the second KT state (small win RUSH) will continue. A small win RUSH continuous suggestion effect setting process is executed to determine the presence or absence and type of continuous suggestion effect (step 052 IWS927).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production determination table. As shown in Figure 10-49, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance determination table includes the judgments for no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance, small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance A, and small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance B. A value has been assigned. The small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance A is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined performance image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, for example. Further, the small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance B is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined performance image in a red display color on the image display device 5, for example.

As shown in Figure 10-49, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is highest, and when the setting value is "2", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. If the execution rate is the next highest and the set value is "3", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest and the set value is "4", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. is the next highest, and when the setting value is ``5'', the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is ``6'', the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting lower.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-49, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance A is highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance B has the highest execution rate.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1" and the highest when the set value is "6", but when the set value is in the second KT state, the jackpot probability does not occur. Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, a setting value of "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (high expectation of continuation), and a setting value of "6" It can be said that a certain case is a set state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect, expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small win RUSH) can be increased.

As explained above, the degree of expectation for continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will become longer without a jackpot occurring.

In addition, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest, so especially when the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, Expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) can be further increased.

Next, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used and whether to execute the set value suggestion production or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this step, a process table corresponding to the setting value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 052 IWS928).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step 052 IWS930). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Note that when it is decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the setting value suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928, so that the decoration is The setting value suggestion effect is executed while the symbol is being displayed as a variation (while the symbol is being varied).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and variable display effect processing (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols (while the loss fluctuates during the second KT state).

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer and starts the ornamental symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display effect processing (step S172) (step 052IWS932).

(Variable display processing)
FIG. 10-50 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS8101), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052 IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, if the 1 confirmation command reception flag is set (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the first forced symbol confirmation command reception flag is set or not). (Step 052IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a missed symbol (step 052IWS8109). Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, if the (Step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the second forced symbol confirmation command reception flag is set or not). (Step 052IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a missed symbol (step 052IWS8113). Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 052IWS8108, or if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 052IWS8112, the production control CPU 120 uses the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer. It is checked whether or not timeout has occurred (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the process data for standby performance (step 052IWS8116). Then, the production control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as already explained, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, and the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, resulting in a miss, small hit, or variable jackpot. In this case, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, if the first special symbol fluctuates and displays a small hit, and the second special symbol fluctuates and displays a miss, a small hit, or a probability-variable jackpot, during the small-win game. , the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. The fact that the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer times out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command means that the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted and the first This is a case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the process of steps 052IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, after which the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and finally 1 special The standby performance is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished. Note that the "standby performance" is, for example, a performance in which the image display device 5 is brought into a temporary stop state with the left-center right decorative pattern fluctuating or slightly fluctuating.

Note that, for example, in the case where the image display device 5 also executes a variable display of a system small symbol, a fourth symbol, etc., updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbols or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is resumed and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol The variable display is also stopped and displayed.

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIGS. 10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing the special symbol per waiting process (step S173) in the production control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052 IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process moves to step 052IWS9706. In this feature section 052IW, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705. Then, when executing the jackpot performance, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed to be displayed, but the jackpot effect has not yet been executed. The process moves to step 052IWS9706 without being executed.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the stop symbol display flag 2, which indicates that the small winning symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, is set. (Step 052IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process moves to step 052IWS9717. In this feature section 052IW, when a small winning symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 052IWS9716. Then, when executing the small hit performance, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed but the small win effect has not yet been executed, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052 IWS9703 is displayed. The process moves to step 052IWS9717 without executing any processing.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the performance control CPU 120 displays the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left center right decorative symbol that is being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , small winning symbol) is determined and displayed (step 052IWS9703). In addition, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command and the second forced symbol confirmation designation command are received and the process of replacing the symbol with a missed symbol is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, the performance control CPU 120 replaces the missed symbol with the missed symbol in step 052IWS9703. Performs control to confirm and display.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y of step 052IWS9704), the performance control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9707).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot type of the jackpot that has occurred this time is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS9709). In addition, whether the jackpot type is a 10R certain variable jackpot, 6R certain variable jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot can be determined by, for example, whether the received display result designation command is one of the display result 2 designation command to display result 4 designation command. It can be determined by checking. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the production control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9710).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if there is a jackpot, when starting a jackpot game based on a 2R probability-variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the display of the number of prize balls is not started.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance (step 052IWS9711). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052 IWS9712), and inputs the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number According to data 1), control of the presentation device (image display device 5 as presentation component, various lamps as presentation component, and speakers 8L and 8R as presentation component) is executed (step 052IWS9713).

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot performance process (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

If the jackpot symbol has not been confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (N in step 052IWS9704), and if the small win symbol has been confirmed and displayed in the process in step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9715), the performance control CPU 120 stops. Set symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9717). If the small hit start designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9718).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit performance (step 052IWS9719). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052 IWS9720), and updates the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the production device (image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, and speakers 8L and 8R as production components) is executed (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit performance process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

If the jackpot symbol or the small prize symbol is not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, if a losing symbol is displayed) (N in step 052IWS9704 and N in step 052IWS9715), the production control CPU 120 controls the production control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending production processing)
FIG. 10-53 is a flowchart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the performance period measurement timer (step 052IWS951). The production period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot production processing (see step S176). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the performance period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the performance period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS952), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS953), and displays the performance device (image display device 5) according to the contents of process data n. , game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) (step 052IWS954). For example, effects such as displaying that the jackpot ends or displaying a predetermined character are executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the performance period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052 IWS952), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot game to be ended this time is a jackpot game based on a 6R probability-variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS958). In addition, whether it is a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot is determined by, for example, whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. This can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS959).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS958 to S959, in this example, when a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot is executed, a prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot is displayed. When the game ends, the prize ball number display is erased, and the prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state after the end of the jackpot game.

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot game to be ended this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS960). Note that whether or not it is a 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the production control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS962).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS960 to S962, in this example, when a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, In this example, if the prize ball number display has been displayed before the 2R probability variable jackpot, the prize ball number display will continue to be displayed, but the display will not be updated), and the high probability after the jackpot game ends. /The number of prize balls is displayed during the second KT state.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Example of production)
Next, the performance mode of the performance executed in this feature section 052IW will be explained. First, the presentation mode of the setting value suggestion presentation will be explained. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the presentation mode of the setting value suggestion presentation. In this example, it is possible to perform the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of place. As shown in FIG. 10-54 (A), when the image display device 5 is performing a variable display of the left center right decorative pattern, when the timing to execute the setting value suggestion effect is reached, ) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined character images 052IW001, 052IW002, and 052IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the setting value suggestion effect A, the setting value is set by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW001 in a blue display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1). A value suggestion performance is executed. For example, when executing the setting value suggestion effect C, the setting value is changed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW002 in yellow on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2). Suggestive performance is executed. For example, when executing the setting value suggestion effect E, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3), the setting value is changed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW003 in red on the image display device 5. Suggestive performance is executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-54, the case where setting value suggestion effect A, setting value suggestion effect C, and setting value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when executing setting value suggestion effect B, The predetermined character image is displayed in green, when setting value suggestion effect D is executed, the predetermined character image is displayed in orange display color, and when setting value suggestion effect F is executed, a rainbow is displayed. A predetermined character image is displayed in different display colors.

In this example, depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the fluctuating display of a decorative pattern that is out of place and a setting value suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to tell the player which setting value is currently set. It can create a sense of expectation.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production will be explained. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this example, it is possible to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance in the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, when the second KT state is in progress, as shown in FIG. It is clearly displayed that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when the image display device 5 is performing a variable display of the left center right decorative symbol during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is In this case, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined effect images 052IW005, 052IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case is shown where an image of a racing car is displayed as the predetermined effect images 052IW005, 052IW006. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B1), a mode is adopted in which the predetermined effect image 052IW005 is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Accordingly, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. For example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether the performance is executed or not, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second KT state (small win RUSH) will continue.

Next, the display mode of the right-handed hit notification will be explained. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of right-handed hit notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol results in a jackpot or the variable display of the second special symbol executes and results in a jackpot, when a jackpot game is in progress, As shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) lights up the right-handed display 26 (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 is turned on by the performance control CPU 120 (steps 052IWS2019A, S2019B, S639 reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the right-hitting display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 052IWS624).

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol results in a small hit, during the small hit game, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically In this case, the CPU 103) lights up the right-hand hitting indicator 26 (see step 052IWS2024B). Furthermore, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 is turned on by the performance control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2) (see step 052IWS2025B, S639). . However, unlike during a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-hand hit display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit occurs due to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. The hit notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right hit display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the presentation modes of the over-winning suggestion presentation, the small hit winning suggestion presentation, and the prize ball number display suggestion presentation will be explained. FIG. 10-57 and FIG. 10-58 are explanatory views for explaining the presentation modes of the over-winning suggestion presentation, the small hit winning suggestion presentation, and the prize ball number display suggestion presentation. Note that in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on. Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, a case is shown in which the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on a 10R variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-57(A), during the jackpot game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Jackpot in progress!" and round number displays such as "Round 2". Prize ball number display 052IW008 is displayed. Also, if a normal prize (not an over-win) occurs in the jackpot during a jackpot game, the prize will be displayed in the normal display color (in this example, white) as shown in Figure 10-57 (B). 052IW009 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-win occurs during the jackpot game, and based on the occurrence of the over-win, it is decided to execute the over-win suggestion performance. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(C), the winning display 052IW010 (in this example, the characters "+15") is displayed according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect, and the speaker 8L , 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS305 and S306). For example, when over-winning suggestion performance A is executed, a winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and a winning sound of sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 456, and based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 456, it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect A. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(D), a character display 052IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, a case is shown in which the award pitch number display suggestion effect A is executed, but for example, if it is decided to execute the award pitch number display suggestion effect B, "555" is displayed on the image display device 5. A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and prize pitch number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the award ball count display suggestion effect C, the image display device 5 displays “666
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-58(E), when the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when controlled to the high probability/second KT state, as shown in Figure 10-58 (F), a text display such as "Small hit RUSH in progress!" is displayed, and the prize ball number display 052IW008 continues. will be displayed.

Next, in the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and the game ball enters the special winning slot, but if it is not decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect, the process shown in Figure 10-58 As shown in (F), the winning display 052IW012 (in this example, the characters "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example), and the winning sound is played from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output (see steps 052IWS325, S326).

Next, during the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and the game ball enters the special winning opening, and based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the special winning opening, a small winning winning suggestion presentation is performed. Assume that it has been decided to execute. In this case, as shown in Figure 10-58 (G), the winning display 052IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed according to the determined type of small winning winning suggestion effect, and the speaker From 8L and 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small winning winning suggestion performance A is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability/second KT state, and based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666, it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect F. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58(H), a character display 052IW014 such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, a case is shown in which the award ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, but for example, if it is decided to execute the award pitch number display suggestion effect D, the image display device 5 displays "2456". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E, characters such as "2555 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

Although not shown in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, for example, execution of the prize pitch number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the number of prize pitches reaching 1000. In this case, characters such as "1000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize pitch number emphasizing effect B based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 2000, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , prize pitch number emphasizing effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect C based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 3000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch count emphasizing effect C is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect D based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch count emphasizing effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect E based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch number emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a small hit during a jackpot game or a high probability/second KT state). Although a case is shown in which the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios depending on the total game value awarded by the player, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times the variable display was executed during the high probability/second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F with different selection ratios. The system may be configured to perform the following, and various aspects are possible.

Next, control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be explained. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a jackpot, the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a probability variable jackpot (in this example, 10R probability variable In the case of a jackpot fluctuation resulting in a jackpot (or a 6R probability variable jackpot), as shown in FIG. 10-59(A), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See Y in step 052 IWS1128A).

On the other hand, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, a 6R normal jackpot), the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in Figure 10-59 (B). When this occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1128A, step 052IWS1129A).

In addition, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-59 (C), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See step 052 IWS 1127A N).

During the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol will be a probability variable jackpot (in this example, 10R probability variable). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation resulting in a jackpot, a 6R definite variable jackpot, or a 2R definite variable jackpot, the second special symbol is displayed as a variable even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in Figure 10-59 (D). will continue. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See Y in step 052 IWS1128B).

On the other hand, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, 2R normal jackpot), the small hit symbol will be stopped and displayed as shown in Figure 10-59 (E). When this happens, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (N in step 052IWS1128B, see step 052IWS1129B).

In addition, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-59 (F), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052 IWS1127B).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modification of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in modification 1. In FIG. 10-60, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1127A are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19, but in modification 1, the determination process of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist. .

In modification example 1, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the CPU 103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129A, and sends a first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-60, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 1. In FIG. 10-61, the processes in steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 1, the determination process in step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. .

In modification example 1, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the CPU 103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129B, and sends a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 10-61, the processing at step 052IWS1130B is similar to the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 1.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the first special symbol is fluctuating and displaying a jackpot, whether the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether it is a jackpot fluctuation that normally results in a jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-62 (A), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly displayed as a missed symbol. It is stopped and displayed (see N in step 052IWS1127A, step 052IWS1129A).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-62 (B), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See step 052 IWS 1127A N).

If the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, whether the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot variation that results in a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether it is a jackpot fluctuation that normally results in a jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-62 (C), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly displayed as a missed symbol. It is stopped and displayed (N in step 052IWS1127B, see step 052IWS1129B).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-62 (D), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052 IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in modification 2. In FIG. 10-63, the processing in steps 052IWS1120A to S1126A is the same as those shown in FIG. Instead, the process of step 052IWS1127C is included.

In the second modification, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. In FIG. 10-64, the processing in steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as those shown in FIG. Instead, the process of step 052IWS1127D is included.

In the second modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the process is ended as is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 10-64, the processing at step 052IWS1130B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the first special symbol is fluctuating and displaying a jackpot, whether the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-65(A), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See Y in step 052 IWS1127C).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-65 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127C, step 052IWS1129A).

If the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, whether the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot variation that results in a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-65(C), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See Y in step 052 IWS1127D).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-65 (D), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127D, step 052IWS1129B).

In addition, in addition to the methods shown in Modifications 1 and 2, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of one special symbol while the other special symbol is fluctuating, for example, If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

For example, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that will result in a 10R probability variable jackpot, the second special symbol will be forced to miss and stop, while the second special symbol will become a 2R probability variable jackpot. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, during the normal state (low probability/low base state), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that is being executed is off and fluctuates, It may be configured such that the game is forced to stop regardless of whether it is a small hit fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation. With this configuration, in this example, after 50 fluctuation displays in the low probability/high base state, the transition to the low probability/low base state will occur (see Figure 10-29). When the fluctuating display ends and transitions to the low probability/low base state, 1 to 4 second pending memories are accumulated, and if there is a second pending memory that will be a jackpot, the game will be forced to stop. This can prevent you from hitting the jackpot at an unintended moment. In particular, in a gaming machine that is configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the second starting prize opening where it is easy to win a starting prize is activated. It is also possible to have a winning strategy in which the first starting prize is won and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the first winning opening. This method is effective as a preventive measure.

As mentioned above, various aspects can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in this feature section 052IW, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol and when executing a variable display of the second special symbol, similar control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missed symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 10-59) is shown, different control may be used. FIG. 10-66 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 3. In addition, in modification 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIG. 10-66, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B is the same as those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 3, the determination processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, if the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 052IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as is.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and (C), in Modification 3, during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, small hit, or probability variable jackpot, a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol continues even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, similar to FIGS. 10-59(A) and (C). In addition, as shown in Figures 10-67 (D) and (F), during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a miss, small hit, or probability variable jackpot, the small hit symbol stops in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. When displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol continues even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, similar to FIGS. 10-59(D) and (F).

Also, as shown in Figure 10-67(B), in Modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot. 10-59(B), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the winning symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67(E), in modification example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot. Unlike FIG. 10-59(E), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

As shown in Figure 10-67, in Modification Example 3, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol is forced to be displayed with a missed symbol. The control to stop and display is different.

In addition, in modification 3, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot, the small winning symbol is forced to miss and stops, while the normal jackpot is In the case where the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display is continued, but this is limited to such a mode. do not have. For example, on the contrary, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot, is executed, the variable display will continue, while the normal jackpot will be displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to be forcibly missed and stopped. Also, for example, if a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a jackpot is being executed (regardless of whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), the result will be forcibly removed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot (regardless of whether it is a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot), the change will occur. The display may be configured to continue. In this way, in some form, the control to force the stop to be forced to come off may be different depending on whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 4. In FIG. 10-68, the processing of steps 052IWS1120A to S1128A is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19.

In modification example 4, when the variable display of the first special symbol that does not result in either a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, a 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag to Check whether it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if the probability variable state is not present), the process ends. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that the process of step 052IWS1130A is similar to the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

In modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131A, when a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that normally results in a jackpot, The variable display of the first special symbol is not uniformly forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, but the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol when the probability is in a variable state. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol that normally results in a jackpot is being displayed in a variable manner, if the probability is not in a variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-69 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. In FIG. 10-69, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1128B is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22.

In modification example 4, in step 052IWS1128B, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol that does not result in a 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, or 2R probability variable jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot). checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if the probability variable state is not present), the process ends. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). Note that the process of step 052IWS1130B is similar to the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In modification example 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131B, when a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that normally becomes a jackpot, The variable display of the second special symbol is not uniformly forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol when the probability is in a variable state. On the other hand, even if the second special symbol that normally results in a jackpot is being displayed in a variable manner, if the probability is not in a variable state, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the modification 4, a case was shown in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol depending on whether or not the probability variation flag is set (whether or not it is in a probability variation state). I can't do it. For example, it may be configured to forcibly perform control to stop and display a missed symbol depending on whether or not the special symbol time saving flag is set. Further, for example, it may be configured such that control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol only when in a high probability/low base state (high probability flag is on, high base flag is off). Any type of control may be used as long as it is configured to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol in accordance with the current gaming state.

In addition, if the configuration is configured such that control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol only in the high probability/low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent the fluctuating display of one identification information from normally resulting in a jackpot, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small win RUSH) from being interrupted.

As explained above, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") that have different degrees of advantage for the player. be. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state), and the special state allows the player to control the game. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is easily assigned. Then, in response to a game medium (eg, a game ball) passing through a specific area (eg, a special winning opening), a setting suggestion performance (eg, a small hit winning suggestion performance) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

Specifically, in this example, the system is configured to be able to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect based on the game ball winning in the special winning slot during the high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH). However, during the small win RUSH, the frequency of winning is especially high in the special winning opening, so it is possible to draw attention to the setting suggestion performance (in this example, the suggestion performance when winning a small hit), and improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance. be able to.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance) is executed based on a game ball winning a prize in a special prize opening as a specific area, but such a mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, it may be configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion effect based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), general winning hole 10, or big winning hole as a specific area. good. Further, it may be configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion performance based on the entry of a game ball into an out port as a specific area. Further, for example, the setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable based on the game ball passing through gates such as the passing gate 41 as the specific area.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to set the player to any one of a plurality of setting values (eg, setting values "1" to "6") that have different degrees of advantage for the player. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state), and the special state allows the player to control the game. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is easily assigned. In addition, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a prize pitch display suggestion effect), and the ease with which the setting suggestion effect is executed varies depending on the length of the period in which the special state is controlled (for example, in Figure 10-43 As shown in , when the number of prize balls reaches 456, there is a 3% probability that the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, there is a 2% probability that the prize ball display will be executed. It is possible to execute the number display suggestion performance B, and when the number of prize balls reaches 666, it is possible to execute the number display suggestion performance C with a probability of 1%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, it is possible to execute the number display suggestion performance C. It is possible to execute the award pitch number display suggestion performance D with a probability of %, and when the number of award pitches reaches 2555, it is possible to execute the award pitch number display suggestion production E with a 3% probability, and the number of award pitches is 2666. When the number of pitches is reached, it is possible to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect F with a probability of 2%). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

In this example, the "length of the period during which the special state is controlled" is determined by the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, Although a case is shown in which the prize ball number display suggestion performance is executed during the period until a certain specific game value is awarded, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, "length of period controlled to special state" is the length of period controlled to advantageous state (in this example, jackpot gaming state), or controlled to special state (in this example, small winning gaming state). It may be the length of the period in which the period is set, or it may be the length of the total period.

In addition, when using the length of the period controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) as the "length of the period controlled to a special state", the length of the period from the fanfare of the jackpot game to the ending is used. Alternatively, the length of only the round game during the jackpot game may be used. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that the longer the period from the fanfare of the jackpot game to the ending of the jackpot is, the higher the rate of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, in the case of a jackpot with a small number of rounds during a jackpot game, the prize ball number display suggestion performance may be executed at a higher rate than in a jackpot with a large number of rounds.

For example, the "length of the period controlled by the special state" may be the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state, or the number of variable displays executed during the high probability/second KT state. Accordingly, it may be configured to execute a prize ball number display suggestion effect. In this case, for example, the larger the number of small hits, the higher the rate of the prize pitch display suggestion effect, or the larger the number of variable displays, the higher the rate of the execution of the prize pitch number display suggestion effect. . Also, for example, a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) may be executed at a high rate to display the number of prize balls, and the "length of the period controlled by the special state" may vary. There are many possible ways.

Generally, when a game machine displays a message such as "XXXX OVER" when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number, it displays "1000 OVER" or the like shown in this example, which emphasizes the number of prize balls. The prize balls are displayed in units of a certain degree of limitation, such as in units of 1000 prize balls, such as a display such as "2000 OVER." On the other hand, the award ball number display suggestion performance shown in this example is performed at a different timing than usual, such as when the number of award balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666. Since this is executed, it is possible to make the player expect a high setting while giving a sense of discomfort to the timing of occurrence of the prize ball number display suggestion performance, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display is included. Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. Further, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance in response to control to a special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state, and a game ball enters the special prize opening. (Based on this, it is possible to perform a small hit award suggestion performance and a prize pitch number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the control to the special state.

In addition, this example shows a case where a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance) is executed based on a game ball winning a prize in the special winning opening. , but is not limited to such embodiments. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion effect is executed at the start of a small winning game during small winning fluctuations or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in an open state. Further, for example, the setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. It is sufficient if the setting suggestion effect is executed in some form in response to the control for the small hit.

Further, according to the present feature part 052IW, when controlled to be in an advantageous state and when controlled to be in a special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17) is It can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a medium (for example, a game ball) can easily enter and an difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter. In addition, in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state, a setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are in the open state, Based on the occurrence of winning of game balls in the winning opening or special winning opening, it is possible to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In addition, in this example, when executing a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance) based on the game ball winning a prize in the big winning opening or the special winning opening. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when performing an opening effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, a setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the presentation mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. It is sufficient that the setting suggestion performance is executed in some form in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, when the control of the gaming state is switched (for example, at the start or end of a jackpot game, when transitioning from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) ), it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, in step 052 IWS624, the display mode (eg, display color) of the right-click display is changed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the switching of control of the gaming state.

In this example, "when the control of the gaming state changes" is when the setting is set at the start or end of a jackpot game, or when transitioning from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Although a case is shown in which the suggestive performance is configured to be executable, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the performance period when transitioning to a jackpot game during a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH), or the transition from a jackpot game to a high base state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state) The setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable during the current performance period. Furthermore, for example, a gaming machine configured to shift to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH) based on a predetermined number of fluctuating displays or a predetermined number of small wins occurring during the high base state. In the above, the setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable during the performance period when transitioning from the high base state to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), and there are various times when the control of the gaming state is switched. There are many possible ways.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of right-handed hitting display or left-handed hitting display, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion performance is executed by changing the performance mode of the fanfare performance at the start of the jackpot and the ending performance at the end of the jackpot, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, depending on the number of times the special state is controlled during the special state, the total gaming value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of times variable display is executed during the special state, It is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different selection ratios (for example, depending on the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666, awards can be performed with different selection ratios). Execute pitch count display suggestion effects A to F. Or, for example, according to the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state or the number of variable displays executed during the high probability/second KT state. , the number of prize pitches display suggestions effects A to F may be executed at different selection ratios.) Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the number of times the special state is controlled, the total gaming value, or the number of times variable display is executed.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, the special states include an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state that is disadvantageous for the player compared to the advantageous special state (for example, the first KT state). can be controlled to Further, setting suggestion effects can be executed using different selection ratios depending on when the game medium passes through a specific area during an advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through a specific area during a disadvantageous special state (for example, Only when a small hit occurs and a game ball enters the special prize opening during the second KT state, it is possible to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance and the prize ball number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the type of special state.

In addition, this example shows a case where the small hit winning suggestion performance and the prize ball number display suggestion performance can be executed only when a game ball enters the special winning opening during the second KT state. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, even if a game ball enters the special winning slot during the first KT state, the system is configured to be able to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a display suggesting the number of prize balls, and a game ball enters the special winning slot during the second KT state. It is now possible to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at different rates depending on whether the game ball wins or the game ball enters the special prize opening during the 1st KT state. may be configured. Further, for example, even if an irregular game ball enters a special winning slot during a non-KT state, the system may be configured to be able to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance. .

In the case of the above configuration, if a winning or irregular winning occurs in the special winning opening during the 1st KT state (high base state), and if a winning occurs in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. In comparison, it may be configured to execute a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at a high rate, or a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at a low rate. It may be configured to run.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the value of the prize ball number counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during jackpot games based on 10R definite variable jackpot, 6R definite variable jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot and during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH). is updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during jackpot games based on 2R probability variable winnings and 2R normal jackpots and during high base states (high probability/1st KT state, low probability/1st KT state) (However, (Does not reset the prize pitch counter) In addition, in principle, the prize pitch number display is hidden, and after the 50 fluctuating displays are finished in the low probability/1st KT state, the system returns to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Although a case has been described in which the value of the prize ball counter is controlled to be reset when the transition occurs, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. The value of the prize ball counter may be updated even during a jackpot game based on a 2R probability variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot.

In addition, in this example, by being configured as described above, for example, the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) is finished and the high base state (high probability/first KT state, low probability/first KT state) is completed. After transitioning to the state), if a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs during the high base state and the state shifts again to the high probability/2nd KT state (small win RUSH), the prize during the previous small win RUSH While inheriting the number of pitches, it is possible to update the value of the prize pitch counter and display the prize pitch number display.

In addition, it is not limited to the manner of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, but for example, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs and the transition to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) occurs, the high probability/second KT state (Small win RUSH) and the immediately preceding jackpot game may be regarded as one section, and the number of prize balls in that section may be totaled and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value may be executed by changing the display mode (in this example, display color) of the total value.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, as a "setting suggestion production", a small hit winning suggestion production and a prize ball number display suggestion production in a manner that the current setting value suggests any of the setting values ``1'' to ``6''. Although a case in which the above is executed is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, instead of suggesting the current setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a manner that suggests whether or not a setting change has been made to change the setting value when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. good. In this way, the "setting suggestion effect" may be anything that suggests settings in some form.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. , when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special display result is displayed as a display result of the variable display. When a display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from an advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and it is better to derive and display the first specific display result. It is more advantageous for the player than if the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game). In addition, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information that corresponds to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived and displayed display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or (2) The variable display of special symbols is continuously executed. In addition, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived and displayed, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a missed symbol) (Forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to implement control that takes into account the degree of advantage of the display results of variable display.

Specifically, even though it has moved to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or variable probability state, if it becomes a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) with a variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation of one of the identification information, The second KT state (small win RUSH) or variable probability state will end soon, and there is a possibility that interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining retention of one of the identification information is uniformly forced to stop and display the winning symbols (forced loss), even if the fluctuation display is a guaranteed variable jackpot, it will be a forced loss. As a result, the gaming value given to the player in an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) decreases, which is undesirable. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, while the fluctuation display that usually results in a jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is forced to miss, the fluctuation display that results in a probability variable jackpot is extended by extending the fluctuation (suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time). This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing a decrease in the gaming value given to the player.

In addition, in this example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is Although the case is shown in which the process is executed continuously, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the suspended variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game ends. It's okay. Any method that does not completely stop the variable display may be used.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the second KT state) in which the game value (for example, prize ball) is easily awarded due to the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to a special state, interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state) that is different from an advantageous state and that is easier to control to be an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) state)). Further, based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed, a specific state is controlled (for example, after the end of a jackpot game based on a probability variable jackpot, control is performed to a variable probability state), and a second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, the game is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether or not the control is to be controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the feature part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state) that is different from an advantageous state and that is easier to control to be an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) state)). Further, it is possible to control to a specific state based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through a specific area (for example, V area 052IW104) while being controlled to be in an advantageous state. When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the control is in an advantageous state compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Figure 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to implement control that takes into consideration whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

Furthermore, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to derive and display the special display result regardless of whether variable display of the first identification information or variable display of the second identification information is executed ( (See Figures 10-3 and 10-4). Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display that corresponds to the second specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information, the first identification A variable display of information is derived and displayed based on a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(B)). In addition, if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being performed, the second identification information Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display based on the predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state) that is different from an advantageous state and that is easier to control into an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) state)). Further, the variable display execution means, when controlled to the specific state, variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. During execution, based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (Fig. 10-68, Fig. 10- 69). Further, when the control is in the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which corresponds to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control to derive and display the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see Figures 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to implement control that takes into consideration whether or not a specific state is being controlled.

Further, according to the present feature part 052IW, based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) enters the first start area (for example, the first start prize opening), the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol ), and the variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) can be executed based on the game medium entering the second starting area (e.g., second starting prize opening). It is possible. Further, the variable means (for example, a special variable prize winning state) that can change between a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter. A ball device 17) is provided. In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state that is less advantageous than the advantageous state ( For example, the variable means can be controlled to the first state when the special state is controlled. Further, the first starting area is provided so that game media moving along a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the gaming area) among the movement paths in which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is configured to allow the game medium to enter the first starting area. A game medium that moves along a specific path (for example, the right area of the game area) is provided so that it can enter. In addition, it is possible to perform a specific notification (for example, the right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) to promote the firing of game media to a specific route, and it is possible to variably display the first identification information. When controlled to a special state after being executed, specific notification is not executed (for example, see FIG. 10-56 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of firing of game media.

Specifically, as shown in this feature part 052IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type of the first special symbol is This is configured so that the winning percentage (advantage) of the special winning opening is lower than that of the small winning type on the second special symbol side, and when a small winning occurs in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is In the case where the fluctuation display of the symbols is forcibly removed and stopped, if the right hit notification is executed for a small hit on the first special symbol side with a low winning percentage (advantage), it will effectively The player ends up hitting the game ball in vain even though it is almost impossible to expect to win a prize in the special winning hole, and it is not preferable that a disadvantageous firing promotion notification is performed. Therefore, in this example, right hit notification is executed for a small hit on the second special symbol side, while right hit notification is not executed for a small hit on the first special symbol side. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to wasteful play by the player, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, the first holding storage means (for example, a first holding storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a holding memory, and the variable display of the second identification information. and a second reservation storage means (for example, a second reservation storage buffer) capable of storing information related to the storage device as reservation storage. Furthermore, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) is entered. In addition to being controllable, a special state (for example, It is possible to control the small winning game state). Further, it is possible to control the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (eg, KT state) in which the display result becomes a special display result more frequently. Further, based on the fact that when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, a special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the suspended memory can be smoothly used.

In addition, according to this feature section 052IW, when controlled to a special state, it is possible to give a predetermined value (for example, payout 10 prize balls based on the winning of a game ball to a special prize opening), When controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of game balls in the big winning hole). In addition, as a specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, the lighting of the right-handed hitting indicator 26 and the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification are It is possible to perform a second specific notification (for example, the right-hand hit display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56(1)) that is highly sensitive. Furthermore, when controlled to be in an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see Figure 10-56 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is controlled to be in a special state. In this case, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 10-56 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize notification corresponding to the value that can be provided.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Furthermore, when the first identification information is variablely displayed and then controlled to a special state, it is more advantageous due to a higher ratio than when the second identification information is controlled to a special state after the variable display is executed. Control is performed to a special state of a low degree (for example, small win A). Further, when controlled to a special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, specific notification is executed (see (2) and (3) of FIG. 10-56). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification taking into consideration the player's advantage.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to perform a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to perform a common variable display effect both when controlled by the special state and when not controlled by the special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, , the non-reach pattern is forced to stop displaying). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's ability to recognize that the special state is controlled after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. Furthermore, the pending memory stored in the second pending storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to this characteristic part 052IW, a delay means (for example, a regulating piece provided on the variable winning ball device 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided upstream of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time from being targeted. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen strategies against gaming machines.

Note that the delay means is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example. For example, a passage member is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the gaming area, for moving the game balls in a meandering manner from side to side. You may.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the performance are performed based on information from the game control means. A production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is provided. Further, the game control means controls the execution of notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs predetermined notification. Moreover, the performance control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load on the performance control means.

In addition, in this example, the right hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Although this example is illustrated, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a special variable winning ball device (large left winning hole) is provided on the left side of the gaming area, a special variable winning ball device (large right winning hole) is also provided on the right side of the gaming area, and the first special If a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of symbols, the left big prize opening is opened during the jackpot game, and when a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the right big prize opening is opened during the jackpot game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as such, if a jackpot is achieved with the variable display of the second special symbol, a right hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, while with the variable display of the first special symbol. In the case of a jackpot, the right hit notification may not be executed during the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, a left-handed hit notification may be executed during a jackpot game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right large winning hole) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, a left-handed hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, thereby preventing the player from accidentally performing a right-handed operation. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to players.

In addition, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, a case is shown in which the right-handed hit notification is executed even during the KT state. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, when applying to a gaming machine in which the second starting prize opening is provided on the left side of the gaming area, the configuration is such that the right hit notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. Good too.

In addition, in this example, in addition to turning on the right-handed hitting display 26 and the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 only during the jackpot game, the right-handed hitting display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to notify the right-handed hitting. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when performing the first variable display after the end of the jackpot game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed hit indicator 26 and the right-handed hit notification LED 37. The right-handed hit notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed hit display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, in addition to turning on the right-handed hit display 26 and the right-handed hit notification LED 37, the right-handed hit display 052IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. It may also be configured such that the right-handed hit notification is executed.

Furthermore, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large right-handed batting display 052IW007 as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), a symbol display indicating right-handed batting (for example, a right-pointing triangular display) may be displayed on the image display device 5. Accordingly, the right-handed hit notification may be configured to be executable.

Moreover, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball devices (special winning openings) to be opened are different depending on the type of small winning, and the variable display of the first special symbol is used to indicate the small winning. The selection ratio of the small winning type may be configured to be different depending on whether the small winning occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol or the small winning. In this case, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small winning type that is opened by the special variable winning ball device with a small number of winning balls (or the small winning type in the opening mode with a low winning rate) is likely to be selected. , When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, the small winning type opened by the special variable winning ball device with a large number of winning balls (or the small winning type in the opening mode with a high winning rate) is likely to be selected. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in this example, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right hit notification is performed during the small hit game (see Figure 10-56 (2)), and the variable display of the first special symbol is notified. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see Figure 10-56 (3)), but in the case where a small hit occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol. It may also be configured such that there are cases where the right-handed player is not notified. For example, if a variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs in a normal state where a left-handed operation should be performed, the configuration is such that the right-handed hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the state to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player. It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state). It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a variable probability state) and a specific state (for example, a variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to be advantageous than the non-specific state. In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display is included. Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. Furthermore, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value, and is the same when the control is in a non-specific state and when the control is in a specific state (Figures 10-3 and 10-3). -4)). Therefore, appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

Specifically, if the lottery probability and type distribution other than the jackpot winning probability change depending on the setting value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball payout performance) depending on the setting value may become too noticeable, and the gambling quality may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of special judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the small winning probability common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the setting value. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol). (can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency with which the display result becomes a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is increased. Therefore, appropriate gaming performance can be realized in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to this feature part 052IW, the special states include a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, appropriate gaming performance can be achieved.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion performance (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance shown in FIG. 10-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a losing symbol) that is different from a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) and a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived as a display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, a setting value suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (for example, a setting value suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-54) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the setting value suggestion performance, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Although this example shows a case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance and the set value suggestion performance are executed in the fluctuating display that results in a loss, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to execute a small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance or a set value suggestion performance during a jackpot game or a small win game, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Furthermore, the number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see Figure 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

Specifically, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of special type judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of the small hit type the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is not excessive. This prevents it from becoming too large and prevents the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-6, the allocation of the small hit type is the same regardless of the setting value "1" to "6". It is not limited to this aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the small winning type may be changed depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" is set, so that the advantage level may differ depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature part 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 2R normal jackpot). Further, the type of advantageous state is determined using an advantageous type determination value (for example, a jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Furthermore, the number of advantageous type determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature section 052IW, by making the number of advantageous type judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of jackpot types the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is excessively large. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-5, the allocation of the jackpot type is the same regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", but such It is not limited to the form. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be varied depending on the setting value "1" to "6", so that the advantageous degree may differ depending on the setting value.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of variable display mode judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of variation patterns the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is not excessive. This prevents it from becoming too large and prevents the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In particular, if the selection rate of the variable pattern differs depending on the setting value, the period from one small win control to the next small win control will change, so even if the small win winning probability is the same, it is advantageous in factors other than the jackpot lottery. This is undesirable because the degree (difference in ball output performance) differs greatly, but this characteristic part 052IW prevents such problems from occurring by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern the same regardless of the setting value. ing.

In this example, as shown in Figure 10-10, the allocation of the fluctuation pattern is the same regardless of the set value "1" to "6". It is not limited to the form. For example, by changing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern depending on the setting value "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the fluctuation time, the fluctuation efficiency can be made different depending on the setting value. It may also be configured such that the degree of advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the state to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player. It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state). It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for determining the derivation and display of the variable display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined judgment value (for example, a judgment value for a deviation judgment) is included. Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. Further, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined judgment value is included in the judgment values corresponding to all setting values, and the number of predetermined judgment values varies depending on the setting value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, control is possible between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probability variable state) and a specific state (for example, a probability variable state) that is more likely to be controlled to be an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all setting values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during a specific state.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol). (can be executed in parallel with variable display). Further, the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is greater than the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state is The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to control the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result becomes a special display result more frequently. In addition, when a variable display is executed that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, a losing symbol) is derived and displayed, a setting value suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-54) Value suggestion performance) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the setting value suggestion performance, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to variably display the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and to variably display the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state). It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) is included for determining the derivation and display of . Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. In addition, the number of special judgment values among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is the same regardless of the set value (see Figure 10-4), and the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is the same regardless of the setting value (see Figure 10-4). The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate gameplay.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of identification information with a predetermined display result (forced stoppage), the advantage of the display result of the variable display is It was not possible to realize control that took the degree into consideration. Therefore, the present feature section 052IW includes the following gaming machines (means A1) to (means A6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can realize control that takes into account the advantageous degree of the display result of the variable display. Characteristic configurations of are also disclosed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play games, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a variable display of second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can execute the variable display of the symbols) in parallel, and the display of the variable display As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a special state different from an advantageous state ( For example, a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can control the small winning game state), and a variable display execution means is based on deriving and displaying a special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol continues) execution), and a second control (for example, displaying a losing symbol and stopping (for example, displaying a losing symbol) to derive and display the variable display of one of the identification information with a predetermined display result (for example, a losing symbol) (for example, displaying a losing symbol and stopping (for example, the first special symbol or The variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed when the symbol falls off. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B depending on the determination results of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, In modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display.

(Means A2) In means A1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is easily given due to a special state; Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion that executes step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be improved by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to the special state.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or A2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the advantageous state is Specific state control means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed. (For example, control to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot), control to a non-specific state based on the second specific display result being derived and displayed (For example, control to a non-specific state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot) It may be configured such that the control is not later controlled to a variable state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether or not the control is to be performed in a specific state.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to A3, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , a specific state that is different from an advantageous state and can be controlled into a specific state (e.g., a high probability state (variable probability state)) that is easier to control into an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., a low probability state) The specific state control means includes a control means (e.g., a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls the specific region (e.g., V area 052IWS104) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passing of the game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the control is in an advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in a jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2) As shown in , in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short. According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to A4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), The variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (for example, when executing a variable display of the first identification information or when executing a variable display of the second identification information). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4), a variable display of the first identification information and a second specific display result. During the execution of the variable display corresponding to , the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in the modified example 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A when the result in step 052IWS1128A is N. (See FIG. 10-67(B).), Variable second identification information If a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during execution of a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the second identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. Control to derive and display is not performed (for example, in Modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67 (See (E).). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

(Means A6) In any of the means A1 to A5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), Specific state control that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state)) that is different from an advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) The variable display execution means includes a means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the variable display execution means displays the first identification information and the Based on the fact that during the execution of the variable display of one of the second identification information corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Then, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) Execute step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A (see Figures 10-68 and 10-69), change one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the control is in a non-specific state. If a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A, S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A, S1131B. -68, see Figure 10-69). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether or not a specific state is being controlled in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of identification information with a predetermined display result (forced stoppage), the advantage of the display result of the variable display is It was not possible to realize control that took the degree into consideration. Therefore, the present feature section 052IW includes the following gaming machines (means B1) to (means B6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can realize control that takes into account the advantageous degree of the display result of the variable display. Characteristic configurations of are also disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play games, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a variable display of second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can execute the variable display of the symbols) in parallel, and the display of the variable display As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a special state different from an advantageous state ( For example, a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can control the small winning game state), and a variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying special display results, regardless of whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or variable display of the second identification information (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control (Specifically, the CPU 103 executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), variably displays one of the first identification information and the second identification information. is executed, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the first control (for example, the first variable time The update of the timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continued), and the variable display of the identification information of one of them is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, Second control to derive and display (for example, display a missed symbol and stop (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a missed symbol) Whether the first control or the second control is executed depends on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically The CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display.

(Means B2) In means B1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is easily given due to a special state; Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion that executes step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be improved by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to the special state.

(Means B3) In means B1 or B2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the advantageous state is Specific state control means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed. (For example, control to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot), control to a non-specific state based on the second specific display result being derived and displayed (For example, control to a non-specific state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot) It may be configured such that the control is not later controlled to a variable state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether or not the control is to be performed in a specific state.

(Means B4) In any of the means B1 to B3, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , a specific state that is different from an advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (e.g., a high probability state (probability variable state)) that is easier to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., a low probability state) The specific state control means includes a control means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls a specific area (for example, when controlled to be in an advantageous state). It is possible to control to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can control the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) in steps 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the control is in an advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in a jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2) As shown in FIG. 1, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to B4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), The variable display execution means derives and displays the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information while executing the variable display of the first identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result. , the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 3, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is N in step 052IWS1128A, the display in step 052IWS1129A, S1130A (See Figure 10-67 (B).), during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result, a special display is executed in the variable display of the first identification information. When the result is derived and displayed, the variable display of the second identification information is not controlled to be derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured as follows (see FIG. 10-66 and FIG. 10-67(E)) without performing the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

(Means B6) In any of the means B1 to B5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), Specific state control that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state)) that is different from an advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) The variable display execution means includes a means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the variable display execution means displays the first identification information and the Based on the fact that during the execution of the variable display of one of the second identification information corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Then, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) Execute step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A (see Figures 10-68 and 10-69), change one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the control is in a non-specific state. If a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A, S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A, S1131B. -68, see Figure 10-69). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not a specific state is being controlled in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Note that the configuration shown in the feature section 052IW can be appropriately combined with the structure shown in the feature section 21TM to configure a gaming machine. For example, a configuration that allows the setting value shown in the feature section 21TM to be changed can be applied to this feature section 052IW, so that a setting value suggestion effect can be executed, or a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , Configure right -handed notes, configure the over -priced suggestion production, configuration, and a prize -winning suggestions can be executed, and a prize ball display suggestive production can be executed. You may also do so. Also, for example, by applying a configuration that allows the setting value shown in the feature section 21TM to be changed to the present feature section 052IW, a small hit may occur in the variable display of one special symbol while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed. In this case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, or the variable display may be continued.

Furthermore, when applying the configuration shown in the feature section 021TM, the setting value may be suggested by changing the mode of the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 9-5. In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including small win RUSH and chance mode, etc., a notification to prevent forgetting to take out a card such as a prepaid card, a manufacturer logo display, etc. It is configured to suggest setting values by changing the mode transition notification, notification to prevent forgetting to remove a card, the display form of the manufacturer logo display, and the display form of images displayed at the same time. You may.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 16SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 16SH will be explained. The gaming machine according to the feature section 16SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the gaming medium passes through a specific area after a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 16SH includes a setting means that can set the setting value to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. In the pachinko game machine 1 according to this implementation, in the setting change mode in the power-on process shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to one of six different setting values. It includes a configurable CPU 103.

Further, the gaming machine according to the feature section 16SH includes a performance execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion performance that provides a suggestion regarding the setting means. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a suggestion effect when waiting to pass through a gate, which indicates the current setting value among six setting values from 1 to 6, which are setting values for the probability of winning a jackpot. A control CPU 120 is provided.

The performance execution means related to the feature section 16SH can execute the setting suggestion performance during a period from when a predetermined condition is established until the game medium passes through a specific area. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the gate passage waiting time suggestion performance during the gate passage waiting period from when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes the passage gate 41.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the feature section 16SH can execute a firing notification that notifies that the game medium should be fired toward a specific area during a period from when a predetermined condition is established until the game medium passes through the specific area. It is. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, a game ball is fired at the passing gate 41 during a waiting period for the game ball to pass through the gate after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. It is possible to execute a right-hitting notification that prompts the player to hit the right.

Further, the effect execution means related to the feature section 16SH makes suggestions regarding settings by executing a firing notification in one of a plurality of special modes different from the normal mode as a setting suggestion effect. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment has a special effect in which the background color is one of "green", "red", and "rainbow color", which is different from "white", as a suggested effect while waiting to pass through the gate. By executing the right-handed notification of the mode, the current setting value is suggested, thereby suggesting the current setting value.

Further, the gaming machine according to the feature section 16SH can perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment can execute the first special figure game and the second special figure game in parallel.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the feature section 16SH has a variable decoration that can perform variable display of decorative identification information in response to either variable display of the first identification information or variable display of the second identification information. A display execution means is provided. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes a production control CPU 120 that can perform variable display of decorative symbols in response to either a first special symbol game or a second special symbol game. .

In addition, the effect execution means related to the characteristic part 16SH is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the variable display in which the variable display of the decoration identification information is being executed, and the variable display in which the variable display of the decoration identification information is not executed. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion performance at different rates depending on when the situation is controlled to be advantageous based on. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment is controlled to a jackpot game state based on a special figure game in which a variable display of decorative symbols is executed, and a special figure game in which a variable display of decorative symbols is not executed. It is possible to execute the suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate at a different rate depending on when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the above.

Further, the gaming machine according to the feature section 16SH can be controlled into a plurality of types of advantageous states. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled into jackpot gaming states of a plurality of jackpot types.

Further, the effect execution means related to the feature section 16SH can execute setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the type of advantageous state. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the gate passage waiting time suggestion performance at different rates depending on the type of jackpot in the jackpot game state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the feature section 16SH has different advantages for the player depending on the type of advantageous state. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the jackpot type.

Further, the performance execution means related to the feature section 16SH can execute the setting suggestion performance at different rates depending on the degree of advantage of the advantageous state. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the gate passage waiting time suggestion performance at different rates depending on the number of rounds in the jackpot game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 16SH, the gaming state after the end of the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the jackpot type.

Further, the performance execution means related to the feature section 16SH can execute the setting suggestion performance at different rates depending on the gaming state after the end of the advantageous state. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the gate passage waiting time suggestion performance at different rates depending on the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the feature section 16SH can perform variable display based on the establishment of a start condition. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball that has passed through the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. Later, the first special figure game can be executed based on the first start condition being satisfied, for example, due to the completion of the previous first special figure game or jackpot game state. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment has a second starting condition when the game ball that has passed through the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B. After the second special figure game is established, the second special figure game can be executed based on the second start condition being established, for example, due to the completion of the previous second special figure game or jackpot game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 16SH, the start condition is not satisfied during the period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game medium passes through the specific area. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in step 052IWS50A in the first special symbol normal process shown in FIG. Step 052IWS50A;N), the first start condition is not satisfied and the first special symbol game is not executed. Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in step 052IWS50B in the second special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 10-21, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating gate passage waiting process. In the case (step 052IWS50B; N), the second start condition is not satisfied and the second special figure game is not executed.

(Suggestive effect processing while waiting to pass through the gate)
FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the gate passage waiting time suggestion performance process executed in step S173 in the performance control process shown in FIG. In the gate passage waiting time suggestion performance process shown in FIG. 11-1, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the right-handed hit notification is being executed (step 16SHS1). Here, the performance control CPU 120 performs a game operation to shoot the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 during a waiting period for the game ball to pass through the gate after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. Execute a right-handed notification to remind people to hit the right hand. In the process of step 16SHS1, for example, a right-handed player notification flag that is set to an on state when a right-handed player notification is executed is provided, and the determination is made based on whether or not this right-handed player notification flag is in an on state. do it.

If the right hit notification is not being executed in step 16SHS1 (step 16SHS1; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a gate passage wait designation command has been received (step 16SHS2). Here, the gate passage waiting designation command is an effect control command for deriving and displaying a jackpot symbol and specifying that a gate passage waiting period has started in which the game ball waits for passing through the passage gate 41. For example, in the accessory control process process shown in FIG. Transmission settings for transmitting to the control board 12 are performed.

If the gate passage waiting designation command is not received at step 16SHS2 (step 16SHS2; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the gate passage waiting time suggestion effect processing. In this way, even if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the right hit notification is not started when the gate passage waiting designation command is not received.

On the other hand, if the gate passage waiting designation command has been received in step 16SHS2 (step 16SHS2; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of the gate passage waiting suggestion effect (step 16SHS3). In the process of step 16SHS3, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a suggested effect when waiting to pass through a gate, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effects, is extracted, The presence or absence and type of the suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate may be determined by referring to the suggestion effect determination table while waiting to pass through the gate.

(Suggestion effect decision table while waiting to pass through the gate)
FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3 show examples of the structure of the suggestion effect determination table when waiting to pass through the gate. As shown in Figures 11-2 and 11-3, in the suggestion effect determination table when waiting to pass through the gate, for example, depending on whether the current setting value of the jackpot winning probability is between "1" and "6", , "No suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate", "Suggestion performance A while waiting to pass through the gate", "Suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate B", "Suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate C". That's fine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, the types of suggestion effects while waiting to pass through the gate are "suggestion effect A while waiting to pass through the gate," "suggestion effect B while waiting to pass through the gate," "Suggestion effect C while waiting to pass through the gate" is set.

Here, when the suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate is not executed, the background becomes "white" during the waiting period for passing through the gate after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. Right-handed hit notification is executed.

On the other hand, when the suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate is executed, the background is different from "white" during the waiting period for passing through the gate from after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. A right-handed hit notification with a special mode of color is executed. For example, when the "suggestion effect A while waiting to pass through the gate" is executed, the background at the time of right hit notification is displayed in "green". Further, when the "suggestion performance B while waiting to pass through the gate" is executed, the background when the right hit is notified is displayed in "red". Further, when the "suggestion effect C while waiting to pass through the gate" is executed, the background at the time of right hit notification is displayed in "rainbow color".

In the process of step 16SHS3, the performance control CPU 120 checks the storage contents of the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate are determined.

The suggestion effect determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in Figure 11-2 is used when the display result of the first special game is a "jackpot" in the normal state or when the second special game is in the KT state. This table is referred to when the display result is a "jackpot".

Here, the production control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative symbols in response to the first special figure game in the normal state, and variable display of decorative symbols in response to the second special figure game in the KT state. Execute. Therefore, the table for determining the suggested effect while waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-2 is a table that is referred to when the display result of the special figure game corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols is a "jackpot".

According to the suggestion effect determination table for waiting to pass through a gate shown in FIG. 11-2, “suggestion effect A while waiting to pass through a gate” is executed regardless of the current setting value from “1” to “6”. It can be determined that According to such a configuration, when the display result of the special figure game corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols is a "jackpot", the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. During the period of waiting to pass through the gate up to It is not conclusively suggested whether this is the case.

Furthermore, according to the suggestion performance determination table for waiting to pass through a gate shown in FIG. However, if the current setting value is one of the setting values ``1'' to ``3'', it may be decided to execute ``suggestion effect B while waiting to pass through the gate''. I don't get it. According to such a configuration, when the display result of the special figure game corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols is a "jackpot", the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. During the period of waiting to pass through the gate, when "Suggestion effect B while waiting to pass through the gate" is executed and the background at the time of right-hand hit notification is displayed in "red", the current setting value will change to the setting value "4" to "6". It is definitely suggested that it is one of the following.

Furthermore, according to the table for determining the suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. However, if the current setting value is one of "1" to "5", it cannot be determined to execute "suggestion effect C while waiting to pass through the gate." According to such a configuration, when the display result of the special figure game corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols is a "jackpot", the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. During the period of waiting for the player to pass through the gate, when the "suggestion effect C while waiting to pass the gate" is executed and the background at the time of right-hand hit notification is displayed in "rainbow color", the current setting value is the setting value "6". This is definitely suggested.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 refers to a different gate passage waiting time suggestion performance determination table depending on which type of jackpot is the "jackpot". In other words, the performance control CPU 120 refers to different gate passage waiting suggested performance determination tables depending on the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the game state after the end of the jackpot game state.

The suggested performance determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-2(A) is a table that is referred to when the display result of the second special symbol game is "2R normal jackpot" in the KT state. In other words, the suggested performance determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-2(A) indicates that the display result of the special pattern game corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "jackpot", and the state enters the 2nd round jackpot game state. This table is referred to when the jackpot gaming state is controlled and shifted to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The suggested effect determination table while waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-2(B) is a table that is referred to when the display result of the first special symbol game is "6R normal jackpot" in the normal state. In other words, in the suggestion effect determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the display result of the special pattern game corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "jackpot", and the state enters the 6th round jackpot game state. This is a table that is referred to when the jackpot gaming state is controlled and shifted to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The suggestion effect determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in Figure 11-2(C) is used when the display result of the first special game is "6R guaranteed strange jackpot" in the normal state or when the This is a table that is referred to when the display result of the 2-special figure game is "6R sure-change jackpot." In other words, the suggested performance determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-2(C) indicates that the display result of the special pattern game corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "jackpot" and the state enters the 6th round jackpot game state. This table is referred to when the high probability state is entered after the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

The suggested performance determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-2(D) is a table that is referred to when the display result of the second special symbol game is "2R probability strange jackpot" in the KT state. In other words, the suggested performance determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-2(D) indicates that the display result of the special pattern game corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "jackpot" and the state enters the 2nd round jackpot game state. This table is referred to when the high probability state is entered after the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

The suggestion effect determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in Figure 11-2 (E) is used when the display result of the first special game is "10R probability strange jackpot" in the normal state or when the This is a table that is referred to when the display result of the 2 special figure game is "10R guaranteed strange jackpot". In other words, the suggested performance determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-2 (E) indicates that the display result of the special pattern game corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "jackpot", and the game enters a 10-round jackpot game state. This table is referred to when the high probability state is entered after the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Here, as shown in Figure 10-29, when the display result of the first special figure game is "6R normal jackpot" in the normal state, and when the display result of the second special figure game is in the KT state, In either case, when the game becomes a "2R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the low probability/first KT state. Therefore, if the display result of the first special figure game is "6R normal jackpot" in the normal state, since the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is large, the second special figure game in the KT state is It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is greater than when the display result is "2R normal jackpot".

In this embodiment, according to the suggestion performance determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIGS. 11-2 (A) and (B), the display result of the first special game is "6R normal jackpot" in the normal state. In this case, the decision ratio of "suggestion effect A while waiting to pass the gate" is lower than when the display result of the second special map game is "2R normal jackpot" in the KT state, and The decision ratios for ``Suggestion performance B while waiting to pass through'' and ``Suggestion performance C while waiting to pass through the gate'' are high. According to such a configuration, when the gaming states after the end of the jackpot gaming state are the same, the larger the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, in other words, the "jackpot" that is more advantageous to the player. ”, it is more definitively suggested that the current setting value is one of the setting values “4” to “6”, or that the current setting value is the setting value “6”. easy.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-29, when the display result of the first special pattern game is "6R probability strange jackpot" in the normal state, and when the display result of the second special pattern game is in the KT state, In both cases, when the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the high probability/first KT state, whereas in the normal state, the first special game is displayed. When the result is "6R normal jackpot", after the jackpot gaming state ends, the game shifts to the low probability/first KT state. Therefore, if the display result of the first special pattern game is "6R guaranteed strange jackpot" in the normal state, or if the display result of the second special pattern game becomes "6R certain strange jackpot" in the KT state. Since the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, it is more advantageous for the player than when the display result of the first special symbol game is "6R normal jackpot" in the normal state. It can be said that the degree is large.

In this embodiment, according to the suggestion performance determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIGS. 11-2 (B) and (C), the display result of the first special game is "6R probability strange jackpot" in the normal state. , or if the display result of the second special pattern game is "6R regular jackpot" in the KT state, the display result of the first special pattern game is "6R normal jackpot" in the normal state. '', the decision ratio of "Suggestion performance A while waiting to pass through the gate" is lower, and the decision ratio of "Suggestion performance B while waiting to pass through the gate" and "Suggestion performance C while waiting to pass through the gate" is higher. . According to such a configuration, when the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is the same, it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a high probability state. In the case of a "big hit" with a high degree of success, the current setting value is one of the setting values ``4'' to ``6'', or the current setting value is the setting value ``6''. is likely to be definitively suggested.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-29, if the display result of the second special figure game becomes "2R probability strange jackpot" when in the KT state, after the end of the jackpot game state, the high probability/second KT state In contrast, when the display result of the first special figure game becomes "6R definite strange jackpot" in the normal state, and the display result of the second special figure game becomes "6R definite strange jackpot" in the KT state. In either case, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the state shifts to the high probability/first KT state. Therefore, in the KT state, if the display result of the second special symbol game becomes "2R guaranteed strange jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the game ball will easily enter the special prize opening and the prize ball will be obtained. Since it is controlled to the easy 2nd KT state, if the display result of the 1st special pattern game becomes "6R probability strange jackpot" in the normal state, or the display result of the 2nd special pattern game in the KT state It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is greater than that in the case of a "6R probability-variable jackpot."

In this embodiment, according to the suggestion performance determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIGS. 11-2(C) and (D), the display result of the second special game is "2R probability strange jackpot" in the KT state. In this case, if the display result of the first special figure game is "6R definite strange jackpot" in the normal state, or if the display result of the second special figure game becomes "6R definite strange jackpot" in the KT state. '', the decision ratio for "Suggestive performance A while waiting to pass through the gate" is lower, and the decision ratio for "Suggestive performance B while waiting to pass through the gate" and "Suggestive performance C while waiting to pass through the gate" is higher. . According to such a configuration, even if the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is small, after the end of the jackpot game state, the game ball enters the special winning slot and the prize ball is easily obtained, which is the second KT state. The current set value is one of the set values "4" to "6" when the player is controlled, in other words, when there is a "jackpot" that is more advantageous to the player. In addition, it is easy to definitively suggest that the current setting value is the setting value "6".

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-29, when the display result of the first special pattern game is "10R probability strange jackpot" in the normal state, or when the display result of the second special pattern game is in the KT state, After the jackpot game state ends, in both cases, the display result of the second special symbol game is "2R probability variable jackpot" in the KT state, Transition to high probability/second KT state. Therefore, if the display result of the first special pattern game becomes "10R guaranteed variable jackpot" in the normal state, or if the display result of the second special pattern game becomes "10R variable probability jackpot" in the KT state. Since the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is large, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is greater than when the display result of the second special symbol game is "2R guaranteed strange jackpot" in the KT state. .

In this embodiment, according to the suggestion performance determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D) and (E), the display result of the first special game is "10R guaranteed strange jackpot" in the normal state. , or if the display result of the second special pattern game is "10R guaranteed strange jackpot" in the KT state, the display result of the second special pattern game becomes "2R certain strange jackpot" in the KT state. '', the decision ratio for "Suggestive performance A while waiting to pass through the gate" is lower, and the decision ratio for "Suggestive performance B while waiting to pass through the gate" and "Suggestive performance C while waiting to pass through the gate" is higher. . According to such a configuration, when the gaming states after the end of the jackpot gaming state are the same, the larger the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, in other words, the "jackpot" that is more advantageous to the player. ”, it is more definitively suggested that the current setting value is one of the setting values “4” to “6”, or that the current setting value is the setting value “6”. easy.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the display result of the first special pattern game is "Jackpot" in the normal state, or the display result of the second special pattern game is "Jackpot" in the KT state. In other words, if the display result of the special pattern game corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols is a "jackpot", it is a "jackpot" that is highly advantageous to the player. In this case, it is easier to definitively suggest that the current set value is one of the set values "4" to "6" or that the current set value is the set value "6".

Here, the performance control CPU 120 derives and displays the jackpot symbols so that the jackpot type can be specified, and derives and displays the jackpot symbols so that the jackpot type cannot be specified, and at the same time derives and displays the jackpot symbols so that the jackpot type cannot be specified. There are times when a jackpot performance is performed.

Therefore, when a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed so that the jackpot type can be specified, the more advantageous the player is to the jackpot type of "jackpot", the more the current setting is It is possible to heighten the expectation that the value will definitely be suggested to be one of the set values "4" to "6" or that the current set value is the set value "6".

On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in such a way that the jackpot type cannot be identified, the current set value is one of the set values "4" to "6" as a suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate. By definitely suggesting that the current setting value is the setting value "6", it is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot type is "jackpot" which is highly advantageous to the player. can.

The suggested performance determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in Figure 11-3 is used when the display result of the second special game is a "jackpot" in the normal state, or when the display result of the first special game is in the KT state. This table is referred to when the display result is a "jackpot".

As described above, the production control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative symbols in response to the first special symbol game in the normal state, and displays variable decorative symbols in response to the second special symbol game in the KT state. Execute display. Therefore, the table for determining the suggested effect while waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-3 is a table that is referred to when the display result of the special figure game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols is a "jackpot".

The suggested performance determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in Figure 11-3 (A) is referred to when the display result of the second special game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the normal state is a "jackpot". This is the table that will be used.

According to the suggestion effect determination table when waiting to pass through a gate shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the suggestion effect while waiting to pass through a gate is not executed even if the current setting value is any of the setting values "1" to "6". It was decided that

In a gaming machine that is configured to be controllable in the KT state, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state, a starting prize is placed in the second starting prize opening where it is easy to win a starting prize, and the second special symbol game is played while the first starting prize is played. Although it is possible to play the first special game by starting a prize in the winning slot, according to the configuration shown in Figure 11-3 (A), the decorative pattern can be changed in the normal state. Even if the display result of the second special game that does not correspond to the display is "Jackpot", the suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate is not executed, so the current setting value is suggested by the suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate. This can be done to prevent such strategies from being promoted.

The suggestion effect determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in Figures 11-3 (B) to (D) shows that in the KT state, the display result of the first special symbol game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols is a "jackpot". This table is referenced when

Here, as shown in Figure 10-29, when the display result of the first special figure game is a "jackpot", the second KT The percentage of transitions to high-probability states and the percentage of transitions to high-probability states is low. In addition, as shown in Figure 10-7, when the display result of the first special game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the KT state is a "jackpot", the variable time is set to "10 seconds". It has become.

In this embodiment, according to the suggestion effect determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3 (B) to (D), the display result of the first special game is in the KT state. In the case of a "jackpot", the display result of the first special map game is "jackpot" in the normal state, or the display result of the second special map game is "jackpot" in the KT state. In this case, the decision ratio of "suggestion performance A while waiting to pass through the gate" is lower, and the determination ratio of "suggestion performance B while waiting to pass through the gate" and "suggestion performance C while waiting to pass through the gate" is higher.

Therefore, even though the KT state is controlled to be more advantageous to the player than the normal state, if the display result of the first special game is a "jackpot", the rate of transition to the second KT state , not only is the rate of transition to a high-probability state low, but the KT state ends in 10 seconds, which may reduce interest, as shown in Figures 11-3 (B) to (D). According to such a configuration, if the display result of the first special figure game becomes a "jackpot" in the KT state, the display result of the first special figure game becomes a "jackpot" in the normal state. or when the display result of the second special map game is "Jackpot" in the KT state, the current setting value is one of the setting values "4" to "6", Since it is easy to definitively suggest that the current setting value is the setting value "6", if the current setting value is a high setting of "4" or higher, it will reduce the desire to continue playing. can be increased.

Then, even if the display result of the first special symbol game is a "jackpot" in the KT state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance through different gates depending on which jackpot type the "jackpot" is. Refer to the waiting time suggestion effect determination table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 refers to different gate passage waiting suggested performance determination tables depending on the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the game state after the end of the jackpot game state.

The suggestion effect determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in Figure 11-3 (B) is for the case where the display result of the first special game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the KT state is "10R probability strange jackpot". This is a table referenced by In other words, in the suggestion effect determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-3(B), in the KT state, the display result of the first special symbol game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols is a "jackpot", This table is referred to when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 10 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

The suggested performance determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in Figure 11-3 (C) is for the case where the display result of the first special game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the KT state is "6R probability strange jackpot". This is a table referenced by In other words, in the suggested performance determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-3(C), the display result of the first special symbol game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the KT state is a "jackpot", This table is referred to when the game is controlled to a 6-round jackpot game state and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state.

The suggested performance determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in Figure 11-3 (D) is for the case where the display result of the first special game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the KT state is "6R normal jackpot". This is a table referenced by In other words, in the suggested performance determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. 11-3(D), the display result of the first special symbol game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the KT state is a "jackpot", This table is referred to when the game is controlled to a six-round jackpot game state and is shifted to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot game state.

Here, as shown in Figure 10-29, if the display result of the first special game is "10 normal jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game state, the transition to the high probability/second KT state will occur. On the other hand, when the display result of the first special figure game is "6R probability variable jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the high probability/first KT state. Therefore, when the display result of the first special drawing game is "10 normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the game ball enters the special prize opening and the prize ball is easily obtained in the second KT state. Since it is controlled, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is greater than when the display result of the first special symbol game is "6R probability strange jackpot".

In this embodiment, according to the suggestion performance determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIGS. 11-3 (B) and (C), the display result of the first special game is "6R probability strange jackpot" in the KT state. In this case, the decision ratio of "suggestion effect A while waiting to pass through the gate" is lower than when the display result of the first special drawing game is "10R guaranteed strange jackpot" in the KT state, and "gate The decision ratios for ``Suggestion performance B while waiting to pass through'' and ``Suggestion performance C while waiting to pass through the gate'' are high. According to such a configuration, when the display result of the first special symbol game is a "jackpot" in the KT state, the smaller the number of rounds in the jackpot game state, in other words, the player In the case of a "jackpot" where the degree of advantage for It is easy to suggest that something is certain.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-29, if the display result of the first special drawing game is "6R probability variable jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the high probability/first KT state. If the display result of the first special figure game is "6R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the low probability/first KT state. Therefore, when the display result of the first special figure game becomes "6R probability strange jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game state, it is controlled to a high probability state, so the display result of the first special figure game becomes "6R probability strange jackpot". It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is greater than in the case of ``6R normal jackpot''.

In this embodiment, according to the suggestion performance determination table when waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIGS. 11-3 (C) and (D), the display result of the first special game is "6R normal jackpot" in the KT state. In this case, the decision ratio of "suggestion effect A while waiting to pass the gate" is lower than when the display result of the first special map game is "6R guaranteed strange jackpot" in the KT state, and "gate The decision ratios for ``Suggestion performance B while waiting to pass through'' and ``Suggestion performance C while waiting to pass through the gate'' are high. According to such a configuration, when the display result of the first special symbol game is a "jackpot" in the KT state, it is better to be controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Then, in the case of a "big hit" where the degree of advantage to the player is small, it is better to know that the current setting value is one of the setting values ``4'' to ``6'', or that the current setting value is the setting value. It is easy to definitively suggest that the value is "6".

As described above, in this embodiment, when the display result of the first special pattern game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the KT state becomes a "jackpot", the degree of advantage for the player is small. In the case of a "jackpot", it is more certain that the current setting value is one of the setting values ``4'' to ``6'', or that the current setting value is the setting value ``6''. Easy to suggest.

Therefore, if the display result of the first special symbol game is a "jackpot" in the KT state, it is difficult for the player to The less advantageous the "jackpot" is, the more the player will be motivated to continue playing if the current set value is a high setting of "4" or higher.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-1, after executing the process of step 16SHS3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate based on the determination result of step 16SHS2 (step 16SHS4). ).

If the wait-to-pass-the-gate suggestion effect is not executed in step 16SHS4 (16SHS4; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes a right-handed notification in a normal mode with a "white" background (step 16SHS5), and waits for the person to pass through the gate. The time suggestion production process ends. In this way, if the suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate is not executed, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the normal right-hit notification with a "white" background is started.

On the other hand, when executing the suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate in step 16SHS4 (16SHS4; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes a right-hand hit notification in a special mode in which the background is a color different from "white" (step 16SHS4; Yes). 16SHS6), the suggestion effect processing while waiting to pass through the gate ends. In this manner, when executing the suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, a special mode of right-hitting notification in which the background is a color different from "white" is started.

If the right-handed notification is being executed in step 16SHS1 (step 16SHS1; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special mode right-handed notification is being executed (step 16SHS7). In the process of step 16SHS7, for example, a special mode right-handed hitting notification flag is provided which is set to an on state when a special mode right-handed hitting notification is executed, and this special mode right-handed hitting notification flag is in an on state. The determination may be made based on whether or not.

If the right-handed notification of the special mode is not being executed in step 16SHS7 (step 16SHS7; No), that is, if the right-handed notification of the normal mode is being executed, the production control CPU 120 sets the background to "white". The right-hand hit notification in the normal mode is continued (step 16SHS5), and the suggestion effect processing when waiting to pass through the gate is ended.

On the other hand, if the special mode right hit notification is being executed in step 16SHS7 (step 16SHS7; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a gate passing designation command has been received (step 16SHS8).

If the gate passing designation command is not received in step 16SHS8 (step 16SHS8; No), the production control CPU 120 continues to execute the right-hand hit notification in a special mode in which the background is a color different from "white" (step 16SHS8; No). 16SHS6), the suggestion effect processing while waiting to pass through the gate ends.

On the other hand, if the gate passage waiting designation command is received in step 16SHS8 (step 16SHS8; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 ends the right-hand hit notification in the special mode, and changes the normal mode in which the background is "white". A right-handed hit notification is executed (step 16SHS5). In this manner, when the gate passage waiting time suggestion effect is executed, based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, the right-handed hitting notification in the normal mode is switched to the right-handed hitting notification in the normal mode.

(Example of suggested performance while waiting to pass through the gate)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation operation of the suggestion presentation while waiting to pass through the gate in this embodiment.

In the special symbol per waiting process shown in FIG. 10-51, if neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the performance control CPU 120 will Then, the same decorative symbols that have been temporarily stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are permanently displayed.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image as shown in FIG. A small pattern 16SH1 may be displayed in the lower right portion of the display area of the device 5 as an image corresponding to a decorative pattern that is difficult to see. In that case, the performance control CPU 120, when displaying the decorative pattern in a fixed manner, also causes the small pattern to be displayed in a fixed manner.

After deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol in this way, if it is determined in the gate passage waiting time suggestion performance process shown in FIG. 11-1 not to execute the gate passage waiting time suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 As shown in 11-4 (B1), a normal right-handed hit notification with a "white" background is started. In the right-handed notification executed at this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays, for example, a right-handed hitting notification image 16SH2A, a right-handed hitting notification image 16SH2B, which urges the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the gaming area. Display. Further, the performance control CPU 120 displays, for example, a shooting promotion display 16SH3 that urges the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41.

On the other hand, after deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol, in the gate passing waiting suggestion production process shown in FIG. 11-1, for example, it is decided to execute the gate passing waiting suggestion production C. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 starts right-hit notification in a special mode different from the normal mode in which the background is "rainbow colored", as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2). Also in the right-handed notification executed at this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the right-handed hit notification image 16SH2A, the right-handed hit notification image 16SH2B, and the firing promotion display 16SH3.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 as shown in FIG. 11-4(C) while performing right-handed notification in this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game ball as shown in FIG. 11-4(D). Then, the fanfare performance at the start of the jackpot will start.

Moreover, after starting the fanfare performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes the right-hand hit notification in the normal mode. In the right-handed notification executed at this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays, for example, a right-handed game notification image 16SH2B that urges the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the gaming area.

That is, if the right-hitting notification in the normal mode is executed during the gate passage waiting period from when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes the passing gate 41, the performance control CPU 120 starts the fanfare performance. Even after this, the right-handed hit notification in the normal mode is continued. On the other hand, if the special mode of right-hit notification is executed during the waiting period for the game ball to pass through the gate after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the gate 41, the performance control CPU 120 Based on the fact that the ball has passed through the gate 41, the special mode of right-handed hitting notification is ended, and the right-handed hitting notification of the normal mode is executed.

By the way, when a performance with an extremely low execution rate or a performance with an extremely high reliability is executed, a photo of the performance being executed may be posted to a magazine or SNS (Social Networking Service). . If the posted photo catches the eye of many people, it will lead to an advertising effect for the gaming machine and the gaming parlor where the gaming machine is installed.

For example, when medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button. In the case of a slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, the player can operate the control lever or the stop button according to his/her will. By not playing the game, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding. Therefore, when a slot machine executes a suggestive effect that suggests that the current setting value is high, for example, the player does not proceed with the game of his or her own will, and the player takes a picture of the effect being executed. be able to.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine, the game progresses as time passes during execution of variable display or in a jackpot game state, so it is not possible to prevent the game from progressing according to the player's will. Therefore, in a pachinko game machine, even if a suggestive effect suggesting that the current setting value is high, for example, is executed, it is difficult to photograph the effect being executed.

In relation to such a background, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment is configured to perform a gate passage waiting period from when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes the passage gate 41. It is possible to perform suggestive performances.

Here, as described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, after the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", on the condition that the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, A jackpot gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, even if the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", unless the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the game will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. . That is, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the game can be prevented from progressing by not firing the game ball according to the player's intention. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, a special form of right-hit notification is executed, for example, as a suggestion performance when waiting to pass through a gate, which suggests that the current setting value is high. In this case, by not allowing the player to proceed with the game according to his/her own will, it is possible to photograph the performance being performed.

(Modification example 1 of characteristic part 16SH)
In the above embodiment, a configuration has been described in which the gate passage waiting time suggestion performance can be executed during the gate passage waiting period from when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes the passage gate 41. In such a configuration, it may be possible to perform a setting suggestion performance that suggests the current setting value even during variable display or during a jackpot. In that case, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on whether the period is variable display, waiting time for passing through the gate, or jackpot. In the example shown in FIG. 11-5, the execution rate of the suggestion performance when waiting to pass through the gate is higher than the execution rate of the suggestion performance when the super reach is developed, which can be executed when the super reach is developed during the variable display. In addition, the execution rate of the over-winning suggestion performance that can be executed at the time of over-winning during a jackpot is higher than the execution rate of the suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect may vary depending on whether it is executed during variable display, during gate passage waiting time, or during jackpot. In the example shown in FIG. 11-5, it is more reliable that the current setting value is set higher in the suggestion effect when waiting to pass the gate than in the suggestion effect when the super reach is developed. In other words, the performance execution means can execute the setting suggestion performance during variable display and in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and can execute the setting suggestion performance during variable display and after the predetermined condition is established. The execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is varied depending on whether the period is until the player is in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is different depending on which period it is executed. You can leave it there. Note that the setting suggestion performance executed during the variable display is not limited to the one executed when a super reach develops, but can be executed as various preview performances or special modes of pre-read preview performances. In addition, the setting suggestion performance that is executed during a jackpot is not limited to the one that is executed when over-winning, but can also be executed as special aspects of various performances that are executed during a jackpot, such as fanfare production, ending production, promotion production, etc. be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which period the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Modification example 2 of characteristic part 16SH)
In the embodiment described above, a configuration has been described in which the jackpot game state can be controlled based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, a winning game ball can pass through the special variable winning ball device 17, or a winning game ball can pass through the special variable winning ball device 7, A V area may be provided, and after the game ball passes through the V area in the small win game state, it may be possible to control to the jackpot game state based on the fact that another game ball passes through the passage gate 41. According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the gaming medium passes through a specific area after various predetermined conditions are satisfied, the production effect of the setting suggestion production is enhanced. be able to.

(Modification example 3 of characteristic part 16SH)
In the above embodiment, a configuration has been described in which it is possible to execute a suggestion performance while waiting to pass through a gate that suggests the current set value among the six levels of set values 1 to 6, which are the set values of the jackpot winning probability. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, when the settings are changed in the setting change mode in the power-on processing shown in Figures 9-6 to 9-8, the suggestion effect when waiting to pass through the gate is created. As a result, it may be possible to perform an effect indicating that the settings have been changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase expectations for the setting being changed to a high setting.

(Modification example 4 of characteristic part 16SH)
In the embodiment described above, it may be possible to perform a probability-variable promotion performance that is executed in a predetermined round during a jackpot and displays that the promotion to a probability-variable jackpot has succeeded or failed. There are two types of "non-probable variable jackpots": non-probable variable jackpots in which a fixed variable promotion effect (failure) is executed during the jackpot, and non-probable variable jackpots in which the variable variable promotion effect itself is not executed. There may be two types of probability-variable jackpots, in which a probability-variable promotion performance (success) is performed during the jackpot, and a probability-variable jackpot in which the probability-variable promotion performance itself is not performed. In that case, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable (probability variable promotion performance failure)", the same non-probability variable symbols are all stopped and displayed, and the probability variable promotion performance (failure) is executed during the jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable variable (probable variable promotion effect successful)", the same non-probable variable symbols are all stopped and displayed, and the variable variable promotion effect (successful) is executed during the jackpot. In addition to being performed in a specific round, the variable promotion performance may be performed over multiple rounds, or may be performed during a fanfare performance or an ending performance. Then, when the jackpot type is "probable variable (probable variable promotion effect success)", the suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate is set as a suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate, which is referred to when the display result is "non-probable variable jackpot". By referring to this, it is sufficient to determine the presence or absence and type of the suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate. According to such a configuration, even though the definite variable promotion performance (success) is scheduled to be executed during the jackpot, for example, in the case of a "non-probable variable jackpot", the execution rate is low. By executing the suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate of ``Performance C'', it is possible to prevent the execution of the variable promotion performance (success) from being discovered in advance during the jackpot.

(Modification example 5 of characteristic part 16SH)
In the above-mentioned embodiment, as a suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate, a special mode of right-hit notification is started after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a special mode of right-hit notification is started. The configuration to be terminated has been explained. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a special mode of right hit notification may be started when a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a setting suggestion effect. In addition, the special mode of right-hitting notification may be continued even after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, for example, during execution of a fanfare performance. According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(Variation example 6 of characteristic part 16SH)
In the above-mentioned embodiment, as a suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate, the same type of effect is executed during the waiting period for passing through the gate from after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. explained. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, as a suggestive effect while waiting to pass through the gate, there is an effect in which the mode of the right-handed notification changes depending on the establishment of a specific condition during the waiting period to pass through the gate. may also be executed. In that case, the suggestive performance while waiting to pass through the gate after the change may be more reliable than the suggestive performance while waiting to pass through the gate after the change. For example, as a suggestive performance while waiting to pass through a gate, a performance may be performed in which the mode of the right-hand hit notification changes under a specific condition that a specific time has elapsed. Further, for example, as a suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate, a performance may be executed in which the mode of right hit notification changes with the detection of a motion by the player on the motion detection means as a specific condition. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate.

(Modification example 7 of characteristic part 16SH)
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration has been described in which the current set value is suggested by a right-hand hit notification that is executed during one gate passage waiting period as a suggestion performance when waiting to pass through a gate. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a right-hand hit notification in a different special manner during multiple gate passage waiting periods as a suggestion effect when waiting to pass through a gate, The current setting value may be suggested by a combination of right-handed notification modes. In other words, the effect execution means is capable of executing setting suggestion effects in different special modes for each period from the establishment of a predetermined condition until the game medium passes through the specific area, and multiple setting suggestion effects. Suggestions regarding settings may be made by combining the above aspects. According to this configuration, even if the player is continuously controlled to an advantageous state where the degree of advantage to the player is low, a good suggestion regarding the setting can be made by combining the modes of the setting suggestion presentation multiple times. For example, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 16SH)
In relation to the above-described feature section 16SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that is capable of performing a setting suggestion performance that provides suggestions regarding settings in a gaming machine that is capable of performing multiple types of settings that have different advantages for the player. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902). Furthermore, in gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a need to enhance the presentation effect of the setting suggestion presentation.

Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 related to the feature section 16SH for enhancing the production effect of the setting suggestion production, the game machine is controlled to be in an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the gaming medium passes through a specific area after the predetermined condition is established. (For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) and is advantageous to the player. (For example, in the setting change mode in the power-on process shown in Figures 9-6 to 9-8, the probability of winning the jackpot is a CPU 103, etc. that can set a setting value to any one of six different setting values); A performance control CPU 120, etc. capable of executing a suggested performance while waiting to pass through a gate), and the performance execution means executes the setting suggestion during a period from after the predetermined condition is established until the game medium passes through the specific area. It is possible to execute the effect (for example, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect while waiting for the gate to pass during the gate passage waiting period from when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes the passage gate 41). It may also be a gaming machine characterized by the following.

According to such a configuration, the performance effect of the setting suggestion performance can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature part 16SH includes an ejection for notifying that a game medium should be fired toward the specific area during a period from when the predetermined condition is established until the game medium passes through the specific area. It is possible to perform notification (for example, during the waiting period for the game ball to pass through the gate after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the gate 41, it is possible to notify that the game ball should be fired toward the passing gate 41. The gaming machine of means 1 may be characterized in that it is possible to execute a right-handed hit notification, etc.

According to such a configuration, a player who does not know that the game medium must pass through a specific area in order to be controlled in an advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied is appropriately notified to that effect. be able to.

As the gaming machine of the means 3 related to the feature section 16SH, the effect execution means executes the firing notification in one of a plurality of special modes different from the normal mode as the setting suggestion effect. , gives a suggestion regarding the setting (for example, a special mode in which the background color is one of "green", "red", and "rainbow color", which is different from "white", as a suggestion effect when waiting to pass through the gate) The gaming machine of means 2 may be characterized in that the current setting value is suggested by executing a right-handed notification.

According to such a configuration, even players who know that the game medium must pass through a specific area in order to be controlled in an advantageous state when a predetermined condition is met, can also draw attention to the firing notification. can be improved.

As the gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 16SH, variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the first special figure game and the second special figure game ), and the variable display of the decorative identification information can be executed in response to either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. Equipped with a decorative variable display execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that can execute variable display of decorative patterns in response to either the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game), The effect execution means may be controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display in which the variable display of the decoration identification information is being executed, and the case in which the effect execution means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display in which the variable display of the decoration identification information is not executed. The setting suggestion performance can be executed at different rates depending on the case where the display is controlled to a jackpot game state (for example, when the variable display of decorative symbols is controlled to a jackpot game state based on a special figure game being executed). The method is characterized in that it is possible to perform a suggestion performance while waiting to pass through a gate at a different rate depending on when the jackpot game state is controlled based on a special pattern game in which variable display of decorative symbols is not performed. The game machine may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to 3.

According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a suitable frequency depending on which variable display is used to control the advantageous state.

As the gaming machine of the means 5 related to the feature section 16SH, it is possible to control into multiple types of advantageous states (for example, it is possible to control into jackpot gaming states of multiple types of jackpot types, etc.), and the production execution means It is possible to perform the setting suggestion performance at different rates depending on the type of advantageous state (for example, it is possible to execute the suggestion performance while waiting to pass through the gate at a different rate depending on the jackpot type of the jackpot game state, etc.) The game machine may be any one of means 1 to 4 characterized in that.

According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion performance can be executed at a suitable frequency depending on the type of advantageous state.

As the gaming machine of the means 6 related to the feature section 16SH, the degree of advantage to the player differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the jackpot type), and the effect execution means The setting suggestion effect can be executed at different rates depending on the degree of advantage of the advantageous state (for example, the suggestion effect while waiting to pass through the gate can be executed at different rates depending on the number of rounds in the jackpot game state, etc. ). It may be the gaming machine of means 5 characterized in that.

According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion performance can be executed at a suitable frequency depending on the degree of advantage of the advantageous state.

As the gaming machine of the means 7 related to the feature part 16SH, the gaming state after the end of the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the jackpot type), The performance execution means is capable of executing the setting suggestion performance at different rates depending on the gaming state after the end of the advantageous state (for example, at different rates depending on the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state). The gaming machine of means 5 or 6 may be characterized in that it is possible to perform a suggestive performance while waiting to pass through a gate, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion performance can be executed at a suitable frequency depending on the gaming state after the end of the advantageous state.

As the gaming machine of the means 8 related to the feature part 16SH, it is possible to perform variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball that has passed through the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is the first After the first starting condition is established due to detection by the starting port switch 22A, for example, based on the first starting condition being established due to the completion of the previous first special figure game or jackpot game state, etc. The second starting condition is determined by the fact that the first special figure game can be executed, the game ball that has passed through the second starting prize opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, etc. is established, the second special pattern game can be executed based on the second start condition being satisfied, for example, due to the completion of the previous second special pattern game or jackpot game state, etc.), During the period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game medium passes through the specific area, the start condition is not satisfied (for example, in step 052IWS50A in the first special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 10-17, the accessory control If the value of the process flag is a value indicating gate passage waiting processing (step 052IWS50A; N), the first start condition is not satisfied, and the first special symbol game is not executed, or as shown in FIG. 10-21. At step 052IWS50B in the second special symbol normal process, if the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS50B; N), the second start condition is not satisfied, and the second The game machine may be any one of means 1 to 7 characterized in that the game machine does not execute a special figure game, etc.

According to such a configuration, attention to the setting suggestion effect can be prevented from decreasing.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 16SH may be combined with a part or all of the configurations related to other characteristic portions as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of the configurations of other features as appropriate.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 23SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 23SH will be explained.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a main machine that is provided as a new machine, and a reused machine that uses parts of the main machine to change specifications and is provided at a lower price than the main machine. The main machine and the reused machine have different specifications, but the reused machine is required to use the production control board of the main machine as is in order to keep the price down.

Here, consider a case where the types of selectable setting values are different between the main machine and the reused machine. For example, suppose that the main machine allows you to select 6 setting values from ``1'' to ``6'', and the reused machine allows you to select 3 setting values from ``1'', ``2'', and ``6''. think.

In the embodiment described above, the setting value is set to "XX" of the command E1XX (H) (X = any hexadecimal number) as a production control command (setting command) that specifies the current setting value. An example was explained. For example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 transmits the command E100 (H) as a setting command when the setting value is set to "1", and when the setting value is set to "2", the CPU 103 sends the command E100(H) as the setting command. If the command E101 (H) is sent as a command and the setting value is set to "3", the command E102 (H) is sent as a setting command, and if the setting value is set to "4" , If command E103 (H) is sent as a setting command and the setting value is set to "5", command E104 (H) is sent as a setting command and if the setting value is set to "6" , command E105(H) is sent as a setting command. Then, the production control CPU 120 of the production control board 12 recognizes the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command plus "1" as the setting value (1 to 6), and sets the setting value to "1". ~ Executes an effect that suggests which one is "6".

If you use a machine with these specifications as the main machine and use the production control board as is to make it a reusable machine, even in the reused machine, the current setting value will be changed to "1" or "2" by the setting command sent from the CPU 103. ”, “6”, the performance control CPU 120 must be able to recognize which of the three setting values it is.

As in the embodiment described above, for example, when the CPU 103 of the reusable machine is set to the setting value "1", it transmits the command E100 (H) as a setting command and sets the setting value to "2". If the setting value is set to "6", the command E101 (H) is sent as the setting command, and if the setting value is set to "6", the command E105 (H) is sent as the setting command, then the production control CPU 120 recognizes the value (0, 1, 5) specified by the setting command plus "1" as the setting value (1, 2, 6), and sets the setting value "1", "2", "6". ” It is possible to perform a performance that suggests which one of the following is the case.

By the way, the "Regulations Concerning Certification and Type Testing of Gaming Machines" stipulates the capacity and area size of ROM and RAM of gaming machines. For example, the maximum storage capacity of ROM is 16KB, and the storage capacity of RAM is is limited to 1024 bytes. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, an 8-bit microprocessor written in an assembly language called "Z80" is used as the CPU 103.

Against this background, the programs executed by the CPU 103 are required to have a small capacity. However, when trying to specify discontinuous values such as the three-stage set values of "1", "2", and "6", the program capacity to appropriately specify the discontinuous values becomes large. Put it away.

Therefore, the CPU 103 of the reusable machine processes the three-stage setting values of "1", "2", and "6" as continuous values, and for example, when the setting value is set to "1", the If the command E100 (H) is sent as a command and the setting value is set to "2", the command E101 (H) is sent as a setting command, and if the setting value is set to "6" , so that the command E102 (H) is sent as a setting command, and when the production control CPU 120 receives the command E102 (H), it recognizes that the setting value is "3" if it is the main machine, If it is a reused machine, if the setting value is recognized as "6", the current setting value can be used without compressing the capacity of the main board 11, regardless of the type of setting value that can be selected. It can be recognized by the performance control CPU 120.

However, if the process for recognizing setting values in the performance control CPU 120 is made to differ depending on the type of selectable setting values, new problems may arise. For example, if the design of the types of setting values that can be selected on a reused machine is changed during the development stage, the program related to the processing for recognizing the setting values in the production control CPU must be changed due to the design change. If the program is not changed appropriately, the setting values specified by the setting command may not be correctly recognized. Therefore, it is not necessarily suitable for the performance control CPU 120 to perform different processes for recognizing the setting values depending on the types of selectable setting values.

The gaming machine related to the feature section 23SH can send the current set value to the performance control CPU 120 regardless of the type of selectable set value without causing such a problem or compressing the capacity of the main board 11. It is a gaming machine that can be recognized.

The gaming machine related to the feature section 23SH is a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of types of setting values that have different degrees of advantage to the player. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 will be explained, taking as an example a pachinko game machine 1 in which the probability of winning a jackpot can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values.

The game machine according to the feature section 23SH includes a game control means that controls the progress of the game and transmits commands according to the progress of the game. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes a CPU 103 of the main board 11 that controls the progress of the game and transmits performance control commands in accordance with the progress of the game.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 23SH includes performance control means that controls the execution of performance based on commands transmitted from the game control means. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes an effect control CPU 120 of an effect control board 12 that controls the execution of an effect based on an effect control command transmitted from the CPU 103.

The game control means related to the feature section 23SH controls the progress of the game based on consecutive values that correspond to a plurality of types of setting values. The CPU 103 of this embodiment controls the progress of the game based on successive values that correspond to a plurality of types of selectable setting values.

The game control means related to the characteristic section 23SH transmits a first command that can specify the number of types of setting values, and a second command that can specify the value corresponding to the set value that has been set. The CPU 103 of this embodiment transmits a selectable setting command that can specify the number of types of selectable setting values, and a setting command that can specify the values corresponding to the set setting values.

The effect control means related to the characteristic part 23SH specifies the set value based on the first command and the second command. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment specifies the set value based on the selectable setting command and the setting command.

The effect control means related to the feature section 23SH can control the execution of the effect based on values that correspond to a plurality of types of setting values and are not consecutive. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can control the execution of the effect based on values that correspond to a plurality of types of setting values and are not consecutive.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 23SH includes display means provided on the same board as the game control means. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a display monitor 21TM029 provided on the same main board 11 as the CPU 103.

The game control means related to the characteristic section 23SH can display values that correspond to a plurality of types of setting values and are different from continuous values on the display means. The CPU 103 of this embodiment is capable of displaying, on the display monitor 21TM029, values that correspond to a plurality of types of setting values and are different from continuous values and that are easy for the staff at the game parlor to recognize.

The game control means related to the feature section 23SH transmits the first command together with the power-on command when power supply to the game machine is started or restarted. The CPU 103 of this embodiment transmits a selectable setting command together with an initialization command when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started or restarted.

If the set value cannot be specified, the performance control means related to the feature section 23SH considers the set value to be the set value with the lowest advantage to the player. When the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment cannot specify the set value, it considers the set value to be "1", which has the lowest probability of winning the jackpot.

The effect control means related to the feature section 23SH is capable of executing a suggestive effect that suggests the set value that has been set. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing a preview performance in a special mode that suggests the set value.

When the number of selectable setting values is small, the effect control means related to the characteristic part 23SH identifies which setting value is the set value, compared to when the number of selectable setting values is large. Executes a difficult-to-implement presentation. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment controls the settings by lowering the execution rate of the special mode preview performance when the number of selectable setting values is small than when the number of selectable setting values is large. This makes it difficult to identify which setting value is being used.

The effect control means related to the feature section 23SH is capable of backing up information regarding setting values. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment stores information on the received production control command including the selectable setting command and the setting command in the received command log area, and stores the current setting value recognized as the set setting value. information is stored in the setting value log area.

The effect control means related to the feature section 23SH changes the information to be backed up depending on the purpose. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment treats the information stored in the received command log area as a backup target in some applications, and treats the information stored in the setting value log area as a backup target in other applications. handle.

(Setting value display processing)
FIG. 12-1 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting value display process for displaying the current setting value, which is executed in step S21TM4550 in the power-on process shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8. Here, the "power-on process" is a process executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, as described above.

In the setting value display process shown in FIG. 12-1, the CPU 103 first reads the processing value stored in the setting value storage area (step 23SHS1). Here, the "processing value" is a value corresponding to the current setting value selected by the operation of the clerk at the gaming parlor in the setting change mode.

Then, the CPU 103 determines the setting value corresponding to the processing value read from the setting value storage area as the display setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step 23SHS2). In the process of step 23SHS2, the display setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 may be determined by, for example, referring to a display setting value determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 and prepared. Here, the "display monitor 21TM02" is a display device provided on the main board 11 so as to be visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above.

(Display setting value determination table)
FIG. 12-2 shows an example of the configuration of the display setting value determination table. As shown in FIG. 12-2, in the display setting value determination table, the display setting value may be assigned to one of a plurality of types of setting values, for example, depending on the processing value read from the setting value storage area.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-2(A), when six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" can be selected, the setting value storage area is The display setting value is assigned to one of "1" to "6" depending on whether the processing value read from "0" to "5" is "1" to "6".

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-2 (B), if three levels of setting values "1", "2", and "6" can be set, in the setting value determination table for display, the setting value storage area The display setting value is assigned to one of "1," "2," and "6," depending on whether the processing value read from "0" to "2" is "1," "2," or "6."

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-2 (C), when two levels of setting values "1" and "6" can be set, in the display setting value determination table, the processing read from the setting value storage area is Depending on whether the upper value is "0" or "1", the setting value for display is assigned to either "1" or "6".

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12-1, after executing the process of step 23SHS2, the CPU 103 displays the determined display setting value as the current setting value selected by the operation of the arcade clerk in the setting change mode. The set value is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step 23SHS3), and the set value display process is ended.

In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 displays, as the current setting value, a value that is easy for the staff at the game parlor to recognize, rather than a processing value corresponding to the current setting value.

As described above, this embodiment includes the display monitor 21TM029 provided on the same main board 11 as the CPU 103, and the CPU 103 has a game field that is different from the processing value corresponding to the setting value as a selectable setting value. Since the display monitor 21TM029 displays values that are easy for store staff to recognize, suitable values different from processing values can be displayed as set values on the display monitor 21TM029 provided on the same main board 11 as the CPU 103. can.

(Setting value update process)
FIG. 12-3 is an example of the setting value update process that updates the process value corresponding to the current setting value, which is executed in step S21TM4620 in the power-on process shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8. It is a flowchart which shows. The "setting value update process" is a process that is executed when the setting changeover switch 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. Here, the "setting changeover switch 21TM052" is a setting switch for changing setting values such as the jackpot winning probability, as described above.

In the setting value update process shown in FIG. 12-3, the CPU 103 first reads the processing value stored in the setting value storage area (step 23SHS1), and sets the processing value read from the setting value storage area to 1. are added (step 23 SHS12).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the processing value after the addition is less than or equal to the upper limit value (step 23SHS13). Here, the "upper limit value" is predetermined according to the number of selectable setting values. For example, if six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" can be selected, the processing value "5" corresponding to the setting value "6" is the upper limit. Further, for example, if it is possible to set three setting values of "1", "2", and "6", the processing value "2" corresponding to the setting value "6" becomes the upper limit. Further, for example, if it is possible to set two setting values of "1" and "6", the processing value "1" corresponding to the setting value "6" becomes the upper limit value.

In step 23SHS13, if the processing value after addition is less than or equal to the upper limit (step 23SHS13; Yes), the value in the setting value storage area is updated to the processing value after addition (step 23SHS14), and the setting Ends value update processing.

On the other hand, in step 23SHS13, if the processing value after addition is larger than the upper limit value (step 23SHS13; No), the value of the setting value storage area is initialized (step 23SHS15), and the setting value update process is ended. In the process of step 23 SHS15, the value of the setting value storage area is initialized to a processing value "0" corresponding to the setting value with the lowest jackpot winning probability among the plurality of selectable setting values.

In this manner, when the setting changeover switch 21TM052 is operated, 1 is added to the processing value stored in the setting value storage area. If the processing value after addition is less than or equal to the upper limit value, the setting value corresponding to the processing value after addition is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting value display processing shown in FIG. 12-1. become. On the other hand, if the processing value after addition is larger than the upper limit value, in the setting value display process shown in FIG. 12-1, the setting value with the lowest probability of winning the jackpot will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

(setting command sending process)
FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting command sending process for sending a setting command, which is executed in step 21TM4760 in the power-on process shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

In the setting command transmission process shown in FIG. 23SHS22), the setting command sending process ends.

(Selectable setting command)
FIGS. 12-5 and 12-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the selectable setting command and the setting command, which are transmitted to the production control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 12-5, command 9BXX(H) (X=any hexadecimal number) is a selectable setting command that specifies the type of selectable setting value. Note that the first byte "9B" of command 9BXX(H) indicates that this command is a selectable setting command. Further, the second byte "XX" of command 9BXX(H) indicates the type of setting value that can be selected.

FIG. 12-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the second byte "XX" of the selectable setting command. Although the contents of the first byte are not shown, the most significant bit of each byte is used as an identifier indicating whether the byte containing the most significant bit is the first byte or the second byte of the command. In this embodiment, when the most significant bit is "1", it indicates that it is the first byte of the command, and when the most significant bit is "0", it indicates that it is the second byte of the command. It shows.

The second most significant bit of the second byte is unused and is "0".

The lower 6 bits including the least significant bit of the second byte indicate whether the type of setting value is selectable, and the least significant bit indicates whether the setting value "1" can be selected. , the second bit from the bottom indicates whether the setting value "2" can be selected, the third bit from the bottom indicates whether the setting value "3" can be selected, and the second bit from the bottom indicates whether the setting value "3" can be selected. The fourth bit from the bottom indicates whether the setting value "4" can be selected, and the fifth bit from the bottom indicates whether the setting value "5" can be selected. The sixth bit indicates whether the setting value "6" can be selected. In this embodiment, when a bit is "1", it indicates that the setting value corresponding to that bit can be selected, and when the bit is "0", it indicates that the setting value corresponding to that bit cannot be selected. It shows that it is possible.

For example, if six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" can be selected, the content of the second byte of the selectable setting command will be "00111111", and command 9B3F(H) will be sent as the selectable setting command. be done. Also, for example, if it is possible to set three levels of setting values: "1", "2", and "6", the content of the second byte of the selectable setting command will be "00100011", and the command 9B23 (H) will be Sent as a selectable configuration command. For example, if two levels of setting values, "1" and "6", can be set, the content of the second byte of the selectable setting command will be "00100001", and command 9B21(H) will be the selectable setting command. Sent as . For example, if two levels of setting values "1" and "2" can be set, the content of the second byte of the selectable setting command is "00000011", and command 9B03(H) is the selectable setting command. Sent as .

In this way, the selectable setting commands range from 9B03(H) corresponding to two levels of setting values "1" and "2" to "1" to "2" depending on the combination of a plurality of selectable setting values. It can take any value from 9B3F(H) corresponding to the six-stage setting value of "6".

By receiving such a selectable setting command, the performance control CPU 120 can specify a plurality of selectable setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, when the combinations of selectable setting values are different between the main machine and the reuse machine, even if the main machine and the reuse machine use a common production control CPU 120, the production control CPU 120 is different from the main machine. It is possible to specify a plurality of selectable combinations of setting values for both the case where the machine is a reusable machine and the case where the machine is a reusable machine.

(setting command)
Next, in the example shown in FIG. 12-5, command 9EXX(H) (X=any hexadecimal number) is a setting command that specifies a processing value corresponding to the set setting value. Note that the first byte "9E" of command 9BXX(H) indicates that this command is a setting command. Further, the second byte "XX" of command 9BXX(H) indicates a processing value corresponding to the set value. In the setting command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(B), different EXT data is set depending on the combination of a plurality of selectable setting values.

For example, if six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" can be selected, as shown in Figure 12-6 (B1), among the six levels of setting values, the setting value with the lowest probability of winning the jackpot Six types of commands 9E00(H) to 9E05(H) are prepared as corresponding setting commands in order. Command 9E00(H) is a first setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "0". Command 9E01 (H) is a second setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "1". Command 9E02 (H) is a third setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "2". Command 9E03(H) is a fourth setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "3". Command 9E04 (H) is a fifth setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "4". Command 9E05 (H) is a sixth setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "5".

Also, for example, if it is possible to set three levels of setting values ``1'', ``2'', and ``6'', as shown in Figure 12-6 (B2), among the three levels of setting values, the jackpot Three types of commands 9E00(H) to 9E02(H) are prepared as setting commands corresponding to setting values in descending order of winning probability. Command 9E00(H) is a first setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "0". Command 9E01 (H) is a second setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "1". Command 9E02 (H) is a third setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "2".

For example, if it is possible to set two levels of setting values "1" and "6", as shown in Figure 12-6 (B3), the probability of winning the jackpot is lower among the two levels of setting values. Two types of commands 9E00 (H) and 9E01 (H) are prepared as setting commands corresponding to the setting values in order. Command 9E00(H) is a first setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "0". Command 9E01 (H) is a second setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "1".

As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines the processing values corresponding to the plurality of types of selectable setting values, regardless of whether the plurality of types of selectable setting values are consecutive values. Since it is processed as a continuous value, the capacity of the main board 11 can be avoided.

By receiving such a setting command, the performance control CPU 120 can specify the processing value corresponding to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, when the combinations of selectable setting values are different between the main machine and the reuse machine, even if the main machine and the reuse machine use a common production control CPU 120, the production control CPU 120 is different from the main machine. It is possible to specify the processing values corresponding to the set values in the case where the machine is a reusable machine and the case where the machine is a reused machine.

Then, the production control CPU 120 specifies the set value based on the selectable setting command and the setting command in the command analysis process of step S75 in the production control main process of FIG.

Note that, as described above, in step S21TM1460 of FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on. That is, in the power-on processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, which is executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 103 transmits the selectable setting command and the setting command in step S21TM4760. , an initialization command is sent in step 21TM1460.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 transmits the selectable setting command together with the initialization command when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started or resumed, so that the CPU 103 can transmit the selectable setting command together with the initialization command. , it is possible to make the presentation control means recognize the current set value.

(Command analysis processing)
FIG. 12-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S75 in the production control main process of FIG. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is a command (step 23SHS31). At this time, if there is no received command (step 23SHS31; No), the production control CPU 120 ends the command analysis process.

If there is a received command in step 23SHS31 (step 23SHS31; Yes), the production control CPU 120 stores the production control command reception buffer in the reception command log area provided in the backup RAM (not shown) of the production control board 12. The received command is stored (step 23 SHS32). In the process of step 23SHS32, when storing the received command, the production control CPU 120 also stores information that can specify the date and time when the received command was received. Here, the information stored in the received command log area is referenced for analysis to find the cause of the malfunction, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

After executing the process of step 23SHS32, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a selectable setting command, for example, by checking the received command (step 23SHS33).

If the received command is a selectable setting command in step 23SHS33 (step 23SHS33; Yes), the production control CPU 120 initializes the setting value information storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 23SHS34). Here, the setting value information storage area is an area for storing information that can specify the types of a plurality of selectable setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the set setting values.

(Setting value information storage area)
FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting value information storage area. The setting value information storage area is provided with a plurality of areas in which "setting values" and "setting value flags" are stored in association with each other. In this embodiment, the setting value information storage area is provided with seven areas, a first area to a seventh area. The first area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set value is "0". The second area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set value is "1". The third area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set value is "2". The fourth area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set value is "3". The fifth area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set value is "4". The sixth area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set value is "5". The seventh area is an area that is used when the processing value corresponding to the set value is a value other than "1" to "6", and is an area that should not originally be used. be.

Here, the number of areas provided in the setting value information storage area is based on the one with the largest number of selectable setting values among the main machine and reuse machine, and the number of areas provided in the setting value information storage area is one or more more than that number. It is sufficient if an area is provided. For example, if the number of selectable setting values in six stages is the largest among the main machine and the reuse machine, seven or more areas are provided in the setting value information storage area. Further, for example, if the number of selectable setting values in three stages is the largest among the main machine and the reuse machine, four or more areas may be provided in the setting value information storage area. Further, for example, if two levels of setting values can be selected for both the main machine and the reuse machine, three or more areas may be provided in the setting value information storage area.

“Setting value” stores types of selectable setting values. The "setting value flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the setting value of the type stored in the corresponding "setting value" is set. If the setting value of the type stored in the corresponding "setting value" is set, the value of the "setting value flag" is updated to "1", and the value of the type stored in the corresponding "setting value" is set. If the setting value is not set, the value of the "setting value flag" is updated to "0".

In the process of step 23SHS34, the production control CPU 120 initializes the "setting values" of all areas to the setting value "1", which is the type with the lowest jackpot winning probability. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 clears the "set value flag" of all areas and updates it to "0".

After executing the process of step 23SHS34, the production control CPU 120 analyzes the selectable setting command and specifies the type of selectable setting value (step 23SHS35). As described above, in the selectable setting command, the second byte of the command specifies the type of setting value that can be selected. In the process of step 23SHS35, the production control CPU 120 identifies the type of selectable setting value by checking the second byte of the selectable setting command.

After executing the process of step 23SHS35, the production control CPU 120 stores information on the types of selectable setting values specified in step 23SHS35 in the setting value information storage area (step 23SHS36), and processes the process of step 23SHS31. Return to In the process of step 23SHS36, the types of the specified setting values are stored as "setting value" information in each area of the setting value information storage area in order of setting values with the lowest probability of winning the jackpot. For example, when the settable setting command 9B23 (H) is received and the types of selectable setting values specified in step 23SHS35 are "1", "2", or "6", the production control CPU 120, As shown in FIG. 12-8(B), as "setting value" information, "1" is stored in the first area of the setting value information storage area, "2" is stored in the second area, and "2" is stored in the third area. Store "6" in the area.

By executing such processing, the production control CPU 120 sets the processing values corresponding to the selectable setting values, instead of continuous values such as "0", "1", and "2". , "1", "2", and "6", which can be processed as non-consecutive values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can process the processing values corresponding to the selectable setting values as discontinuous values, so that it can process the processing values that are different from the processing values. The value can be reflected in the performance as a setting value.

If the received command is not a selectable setting command in step 23SHS33 (step 23SHS33; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a setting command (step 23SHS37).

If the received command is a setting command in step 23SHS37 (step 23SHS37; Yes), the production control CPU 120 analyzes the setting command and identifies the processing value corresponding to the set value (step 23SHS37; Yes). 23SHS38). As described above, the setting command specifies the processing value corresponding to the setting value set in the second byte of the command. In the process of step 23SHS38, the production control CPU 120 identifies the processing value corresponding to the set value by checking the second byte of the setting command.

After executing the process of step 23SHS38, the production control CPU 120 stores the process value corresponding to the set value specified in step 23SHS38 in the setting value information storage area (step 23SHS39). In the process of step 23 SHS39, the "setting value flag" of the area corresponding to the specified processing value among the first to sixth areas of the setting value information storage area is updated to "1". For example, when the setting command 9E01 (H) is received and the processing value specified in step 23SHS38 is "1", the production control CPU 120 performs the processing as shown in FIG. 12-8 (C). The value of the "setting value flag" in the second area corresponding to the above value "1" is updated to "1".

Here, if the setting command cannot be received due to the influence of noise or the like, or if a setting command specifying a processing value that does not correspond to any of the selectable setting values is received, the production control CPU 120, The processing value specified in the configuration command cannot be correctly identified. In that case, the production control CPU 120 sets the value of the "setting flag" in the seventh area to "1" when the processing value corresponding to the set value is other than "1" to "6". Update to.

After executing the process of step 23SHS39, the production control CPU 120 specifies the set value that has been set (step 23SHS40). In the process of step 23 SHS40, among the information stored in the setting value information storage area, the type of setting value stored in the "setting value" of the area where the value of the "setting value flag" is "1" is Specify as a set value. For example, if information as shown in Figure 12-8 (C) is stored in the setting value information storage area, it is stored in the "setting value" of the second area where the value of the "setting value flag" is "1". The setting value “2” that is set is specified as the set setting value.

The performance control CPU 120 can specify the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing such processing. Therefore, when the combinations of selectable setting values are different between the main machine and the reuse machine, even if the main machine and the reuse machine use a common production control CPU 120, the production control CPU 120 is different from the main machine. It is possible to specify the setting values set for both the case where the machine is a reused machine and the case where the machine is a reused machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses a selectable setting command that can specify the type of selectable setting value, and a setting command that can specify the processing value corresponding to the set setting value. , and the production control CPU 120 specifies the set value based on the selectable setting command and the setting command. It is possible to make the performance control CPU 120 recognize the current set value regardless of the type.

Here, the "setting value" of the seventh area, which corresponds to a processing value other than "1" to "6", is changed to a value other than "1" by the selectable setting command. The value is never updated and "1" is always stored. Then, as described above, if the setting command cannot be received, or if a setting command that specifies a processing value that does not correspond to any of the selectable setting values is received, the production control CPU 120 The value of the "setting flag" in the seventh area corresponding to a processing value other than "1" to "6" is updated to "1". Therefore, if a setting command cannot be received, or if a setting command that specifies a processing value that does not correspond to any of the selectable setting values is received, the production control CPU 120 will change the value of the "setting value flag". The setting value "1" stored in the "setting value" of the seventh area where "1" is "1" is specified as the set setting value.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 cannot specify the set value, the set value is set to "1", which has the lowest advantage to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent processing from being performed assuming that a setting value having a higher degree of advantage than the currently set setting value is set.

Also, for example, for the main machine, it is possible to select six setting values from "1" to "6", and for the reused machine, it is possible to set setting values for three stages, "1", "2", and "6". In this case, as described above, seven or more areas are provided in the setting value information storage area. Therefore, in a reusable machine, the fourth area to the seventh area are areas that should not originally be used. Even in such a case, in the reusable machine, the "setting values" of the 4th to 7th areas will not be updated to values other than "1" by the selectable setting command, and "1" will always be stored. be done. For example, if the value specified in the setting command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and it is possible to select the setting value in six steps from "1" to "6", the effective setting command 9E03 (H ) to setting command 9E05(H). In that case, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the "setting flag" in any one of the fourth to sixth areas corresponding to the received setting command to "1". Therefore, if the value specified in the setting command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and a valid setting command is received if the setting value can be selected from 6 levels from "1" to "6", The production control CPU 120 sets the setting value "1" stored in the "setting value" of any one of the fourth to sixth regions where the value of the "setting value flag" is "1". Specify as a set value.

After executing the process of step 23SHS40, the production control CPU 120 stores the setting value specified in step 23SHS40 in the setting value log area provided in the backup RAM (not shown) of the production control board 12 (step 23SHS41). , Step 23 returns to the process of SHS31. In the process of step 23SHS41, the performance control CPU 120, when storing the setting value, also stores information that can specify the date and time when the setting value was specified. Here, the information stored in the setting value log area is referred to, for example, in the maintenance mode by a clerk at the game parlor to check the setting change history.

(Maintenance mode)
The maintenance mode is a mode in which, for example, the date and time settings of the real-time clock, the history of occurrence of various errors, and the history of setting changes can be checked. In this embodiment, the maintenance mode is controlled based on the push button 31B being pressed while checking the settings when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, and the performance control CPU 120 is set to the maintenance mode menu. Start displaying the screen.

FIG. 12-9 is a diagram showing a specific example of a display screen when a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed during maintenance mode. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 12-9(A) is being displayed, a clerk at the amusement center presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 12-9(B), and the maintenance mode menu It is assumed that the option 23SH1 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected while the screen is displayed.

When the "setting change/confirmation history" option 23SH1 is selected, the image display device 5 switches to display a setting change/confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. 12-9(C). As shown in Figure 12-9 (C), on the setting change/confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether it is a setting change or confirmation, and the setting value after the change or the setting value that has been confirmed are associated. The log information is displayed in order, with the latest log information at the top.

As described above, in this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 stores information on the received production control command including the selectable setting command and the setting command in the received command log area, and recognizes the information as the set setting value. The current setting value information that has been set is stored in the setting value log area, and in some applications, the information stored in the received command log area is backed up, and in other applications, the information stored in the setting value log area is backed up. Since it is treated as a backup target, information regarding setting values can be suitably utilized depending on the purpose.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12-7, if the received command is not a setting command in step 23SHS37 (step 23SHS37; No), the production control CPU 120 performs settings according to other received commands (step 23SHS42), and steps 23 Return to the processing of SHS31.

(Setting suggestion effect)
In this embodiment as well, similarly to the embodiments described above, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the setting value to the player by changing the mode of a predetermined preview performance depending on the specified setting value.

When executing a predetermined preview performance, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the preview performance will be a special mode in which setting values are suggested or a normal mode in which setting values are not suggested. For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a notice mode that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for production, etc., and reads a notice mode determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. The notification mode may be determined by referring to the information.

FIG. 12-10(A) shows an example of the structure of the notice mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 12-10(A), in the notice mode determination table, for example, depending on whether the number of selectable setting value types is "2" to "6", the notice mode "Normal" It suffices if it is assigned to either one of the following determination results: ``mode (no setting suggestion)'' or ``special mode (with setting suggestion)''.

In the advance notice mode determination table, as shown in Figure 12-10 (A), the larger the number of selectable setting value types, the lower the decision ratio for "normal mode (no setting suggestion)" and the lower the decision ratio for "special mode". (Suggested setting)" is set so that the decision ratio is high.

According to such a setting, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the execution rate of special mode preview effects is lower than when the number of selectable setting values is large, so the special mode preview effects are Even if it is executed, it is difficult to identify which setting value has been set.

In this way, in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a special preview performance that suggests the set value, and when the number of selectable setting values is small, the performance control CPU 120 can By lowering the execution rate of special mode preview effects than when there are many setting values, it is difficult to identify which setting value is set, so the settings that can be selected are Depending on the number of values, suitable suggestion effects can be executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines a special mode pattern to be used as a performance control pattern for the preview performance when executing the special mode preview performance. For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a special mode pattern that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for production, and determines a special mode pattern that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. The special mode pattern may be determined by referring to a table or the like.

FIG. 12-10(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special aspect pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 12-10(B), in the special aspect pattern determination table, the special aspect pattern "Special It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of either "Aspect A" or "Special Aspect B."

In the special mode pattern determination table, as shown in Figure 12-10 (B), the higher the setting value is for the probability of winning the jackpot, the lower the determination rate for "special mode A" and the lower the decision rate for "special mode B". The percentage is set to be high.

According to such a setting, the higher the setting value is for the probability of winning a jackpot, the more likely the preview performance of "Special Mode B" will be executed, so when the preview performance of "Special Mode B" is executed, It is possible to increase expectations that the probability of winning the jackpot is set to a higher setting value than when the preview performance of "A" is executed.

(Modification example 1 of characteristic part 23SH)
In the embodiment described above, a configuration has been described in which the CPU 103 transmits a selectable setting command as a dedicated command that allows the types of selectable setting values to be specified. Instead of such a configuration, the second byte of the initialization command can be used to specify the type of setting value that can be selected, and the CPU 103 uses the second byte of the initialization command to specify the type of setting value that can be selected. It is also possible to send a conversion command. In other words, the game control means may transmit a power-on command as the first command. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to make the performance control means recognize the current setting value regardless of the type of selectable setting value without compressing the capacity of the game control means.

(Modification example 2 of characteristic part 23SH)
In the above embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to consider that the set value is "1", which has the lowest jackpot winning probability, when the set value cannot be specified. explained. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the production control CPU 120 may notify an error when the set value cannot be specified. In other words, the performance control means may notify an error when the set value cannot be specified. According to such a configuration, when it is not possible to specify the setting value that has been set due to fraudulent activity or the like, the staff at the gaming parlor can quickly respond.

(Modification example 3 of characteristic part 23SH)
In the embodiment described above, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the effect control CPU 120 lowers the execution rate of the special mode preview effect when the number of selectable setting values is large than when the number of selectable setting values is large. The configuration that makes it difficult to specify which setting value is currently set has been described. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the production control CPU 120 may be configured to be set more easily than when there are many selectable setting values. It may also be possible to make it difficult to specify which setting value the set value is by reducing the difference in the determination ratio of the special mode pattern depending on the set value. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to perform suitable suggestion effects according to the number of selectable setting values.

(Modification example 4 of characteristic part 23SH)
In the embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a preview performance in a special mode that suggests the set value. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute a special mode of performance that is not a preview performance and suggests the set value that has been set. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to perform suitable suggestion effects according to the number of selectable setting values.

(Modification example 5 of characteristic part 23SH)
In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has been described as having a configuration that suggests the set value. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 may suggest whether or not the set value is a high setting. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 uses a method such as the above embodiment or the third modification to set the high setting value when the number of selectable setting values is small than when the number of selectable setting values is large. What is necessary is to make it difficult to specify whether or not it is. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to perform suitable suggestion effects according to the number of selectable setting values.

(Variation example 6 of characteristic part 23SH)
In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has been described as having a configuration that suggests the set value. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the performance control CPU 120 may indicate whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 uses a method such as the above embodiment or the third modification to set the setting value when the number of selectable setting values is small than when the number of selectable setting values is large. What is necessary is to make it difficult to specify whether is an odd number or an even number. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to perform suitable suggestion effects according to the number of selectable setting values.

(Modification example 7 of characteristic part 23SH)
In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has been described with a configuration that suggests the set value. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the performance control CPU 120 may suggest whether or not there has been a change in the set value. In that case, the production control CPU 120 uses a method such as the above embodiment or the third modification to set the setting value when the number of selectable setting values is small than when the number of selectable setting values is large. What is necessary is to make it difficult to identify whether or not there has been a change. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to perform suitable suggestion effects according to the number of selectable setting values.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 23SH)
In connection with the above feature section 23SH, game control can be set to one of multiple types of setting values that have different advantages for the player, controls the progress of the game, and sends commands in accordance with the progress of the game. and a production control means for controlling execution of production based on a command transmitted from the game control means, and is capable of executing a suggestive production that suggests a setting value set by the production control means. has been proposed (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902). There is a demand for making it possible to use a common effect control means in a plurality of types of gaming machines having different types of selectable setting values. To this end, it is necessary to provide a command system that allows the effect control means to specify the current setting value regardless of the types of selectable setting values. However, due to such a command system, the processing for the game control means to identify the current setting value becomes complicated, which may put pressure on the capacity of the game control means. .

Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 related to the feature section 23SH for making the performance control means recognize the current setting value regardless of the type of selectable setting value without compressing the capacity of the game control means, the player A gaming machine that can be set to any one of multiple types of setting values with different advantages for winning (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 etc. that can be set to any of multiple types of setting values that have different jackpot winning probabilities), A game control means that controls the progress of the game and sends commands according to the progress of the game (for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 that controls the progress of the game and sends production control commands according to the progress of the game) , an effect control means that controls the execution of the effect based on the command transmitted from the game control means (for example, an effect control board 12 that controls the execution of the effect based on the effect control command transmitted from the CPU 103) The game control means controls the progress of the game based on successive values corresponding to multiple types of setting values (for example, the CPU 103 has multiple types of selectable (e.g., controlling the progress of the game based on consecutive values corresponding to the set value), a first command that can specify the number of types of the set value, and a value corresponding to the set value that has been set. (For example, the CPU 103 transmits a selectable setting command that can specify the number of types of selectable setting values, and a second command that can specify the number of types of setting values that are set.) (for example, transmitting a setting command and the like), the production control means specifies the setting value that is set based on the first command and the second command (for example, the production control CPU 120 transmits a selection command, etc.). The game machine may be characterized by specifying a set value based on a possible setting command and a setting command.

According to such a configuration, the performance control means can be made to recognize the current setting value regardless of the type of selectable setting value without compressing the capacity of the game control means.

As the gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 23SH, the performance control means can control the execution of the performance based on values that correspond to a plurality of types of setting values and are not consecutive (for example, the performance control CPU 120 The gaming machine of means 1 may be characterized in that execution of the performance can be controlled based on values that correspond to a plurality of types of setting values and are not consecutive.

According to such a configuration, a suitable value can be reflected in the performance as a set value.

The game machine of the means 3 related to the feature section 23SH includes a display means provided on the same board as the game control means (for example, a display monitor 21TM029 etc. provided on the same main board 11 as the CPU 103), and the game machine controls the game. The means is capable of displaying, on the display means, a value that corresponds to a plurality of types of setting values and is different from the continuous values. The gaming machine of means 1 or 2 may be characterized in that values that can be easily recognized by store staff can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

According to such a configuration, a suitable value can be displayed as a set value on the display means provided on the same board as the game control means.

As the gaming machine of the means 4 related to the feature section 23SH, the gaming control means transmits the first command together with the power-on command when power supply to the gaming machine is started or restarted (for example, the CPU 103 transmits the first command to the pachinko machine). The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3 may be characterized in that a selectable setting command is transmitted together with an initialization command when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started or restarted. .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect control means recognize the current set value without using a power-on command.

In the gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 23SH, when the effect control means cannot specify the set value, the set value is the set value that has the lowest advantage to the player. (For example, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot specify the set value, it is assumed that the set value is "1", which has the lowest probability of winning the jackpot.) etc.) The gaming machine may be any one of means 1 to 4 characterized by the following.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent processing from being performed assuming that a setting value that is more advantageous than the currently set setting value is set.

As the gaming machine of the means 6 related to the feature section 23SH, the performance control means can execute a suggestive performance that suggests the set value (for example, the performance control CPU 120 When the number of selectable setting values is small, the set setting values are more likely to be executed than when the number of selectable setting values is large. (For example, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the effect control CPU 120 executes a suggestive effect in a manner that is difficult to specify whether the setting value is Any one of means 1 to 5, characterized in that by lowering the execution rate of the preview effect of the mode, it is made difficult to specify which setting value is set. It may also be a gaming machine.

According to such a configuration, suitable suggestion effects can be executed according to the number of selectable setting values.

As the gaming machine of the means 7 related to the feature section 23SH, the production control means is capable of backing up information regarding setting values (for example, the production control CPU 120 is capable of receiving information including selectable setting commands and setting commands). (e.g., storing the information of the production control commands that were created in the received command log area, and storing the information of the current setting values recognized as the set values in the setting value log area, etc.), depending on the purpose, (For example, the production control CPU 120 treats the information stored in the received command log area as a backup target for some applications, and handles the information stored in the setting value log area for other applications. The game machine may be any one of means 1 to 6 characterized in that the game machine is treated as a backup target, etc.).

According to such a configuration, information regarding setting values can be suitably utilized depending on the purpose.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 23SH may be combined with a part or all of the configurations related to other characteristic portions as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual feature parts that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other feature parts, as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be set to one of multiple types of setting values that have different advantages for the player (for example, multiple types of setting values that have different jackpot winning probabilities). Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc., which can be set to any one of the following: (e.g., CPU 103 of the main board 11 that transmits production control commands), production control means that controls the execution of production based on commands transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control commands transmitted from CPU 103); Based on the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12 that controls the execution of the performance), display means provided on the same board as the game control means (for example, display monitor 21TM029 provided on the same main board 11 as the CPU 103) etc.), and the game control means controls the progress of the game based on continuous values corresponding to a plurality of types of setting values (for example, the CPU 103 control the progress of the game based on corresponding and continuous values), a first command that can specify the number of types of setting values, and a first command that can specify the values corresponding to the set values that have been set. (For example, the CPU 103 transmits a selectable setting command that can specify the number of types of selectable setting values, and a setting command that can specify the value corresponding to the set setting value. , etc.), and a value that corresponds to multiple types of setting values and is different from continuous values can be displayed on the display means (the CPU 103 transmits continuous values that correspond to multiple types of setting values). (e.g., it is possible to display on the display monitor 21TM029 a value that is easy for a clerk at the game parlor to recognize, which is different from the above), and the effect control means is set based on the first command and the second command. (For example, the production control CPU 120 specifies the set values based on the selectable setting command and the setting command.) a specific performance execution means (for example, a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a specific performance (for example, a SP reach A or SP reach B reach performance) that displays a specific performance, and a first storage area that stores data related to moving images. (for example, storage area 91AKM11, etc.), a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13, etc.) that stores data related to character images, and a moving image control means that controls the display of moving images using the data in the first storage area. (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.), and a character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) that controls the display of character images using the data in the second storage area. , the data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, a display style set by text display setting information). The character image control means is capable of changing the first component and the second component during a display period of a character image added to one moving image. For example, see FIG. 18-7).

According to such a configuration, the performance control means can be made to recognize the current setting value regardless of the type of selectable setting value without compressing the capacity of the game control means. Moreover, a suitable value can be displayed as a set value on a display means provided on the same board as the game control means. Furthermore, appropriate display control becomes possible.

Note that the setting value may be suggested depending on the type of specific effect (for example, a reach effect accompanied by text display) in which a moving image with a text image is displayed. For example, by selecting the production mode of a specific production or the display mode of character images from among multiple types by lottery, etc., and by varying the selection ratio of each production mode or each display mode depending on the set value, the setting The more advantageous the set value is for the player, the more likely it is that a specific effect based on a specific type of effect mode or a specific type of character image display mode is performed. In this way, when a specific effect is performed using a specific type of effect mode or a specific type of character image display mode, expectations that the set value will be advantageous to the player will increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In addition, even if a specific effect using a specific type of effect mode or a specific type of character image display mode is executed but is not controlled to an advantageous state, the set value will be Since the expectation of being advantageous persists, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game when the game is not controlled to be advantageous.

Furthermore, it is possible to make the effect control means recognize the current setting value regardless of the type of selectable setting value without burdening the capacity of the game control means, and it is also possible to control the display appropriately. As an example of the form of the machine, a gaming machine that can execute games (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1), and a specific production that displays a moving image with a character image (for example, SP Reach A or SP Reach B) is used. A first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11, etc.) that stores data related to moving images, and data related to character images. a second storage area (for example, the storage area 91AKM13, etc.), a moving image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) that controls the display of a moving image using the data in the first storage area; a character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) that controls the display of a character image using data in the second storage area; and a second component (such as a display style set by text display setting information); Examples of the means include a gaming machine that can change the first component and the second component during the display period of a character image added to one moving image (see, for example, FIG. 18-7). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(Basic explanation that is the premise of the characteristic part of this embodiment)
First, using FIGS. 13 to 15, we will explain the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that are different from those of FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 described above, which are the premise of the characteristic parts described later. . Other than these differences, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the premise of the feature section, is basically the same as the configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above using FIGS. 1 to 8. The same is true.

FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine, and instead of connecting the frame LED 9 to the performance control board 12 via the LED control board 14, a lamp control The main difference from FIG. 2 is that a game effect lamp 909 is connected via a board 9014. Further, the game effect lamp 909 is provided at a location where the frame LED 9 is provided around the game area in FIG. 1, and the game effect lamp 909 is configured to include an LED.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 13, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 909. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 909 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 9014, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The CPU 103, which has executed the game control main process similar to that shown in FIG. 3 described above, receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S9024). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S9025). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S9026). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 14 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S90101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send a production control command to the production control board 12 for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. . The performance control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S9027 shown in FIG. 14 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small win symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the presentation content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start the round execution in the jackpot gaming state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening upper limit period for keeping the big winning hole open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be in an open state in the small winning game state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Explanation of characteristic parts regarding setting values)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown in the drawings, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching the pachinko game machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting values can be changed, and a lock switch for changing the setting value changing state, which will be described later. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as winning probability (ball output rate), and an opening sensor that detects opening of a slot for a gaming machine are provided. Note that the setting value change state in this embodiment is also a state (setting value confirmation state) in which a game parlor attendant or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch that can be operated by an attendant of the game hall are provided in the setting changeover main body, and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case so that they can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case housing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and setting changeover switch when the gaming machine frame is closed, but they can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame using a designated door key. . Furthermore, since the lock switch requires the operation of a setting key owned by an attendant of the game parlor, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be turned on and off using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but a single key may be used for both.

A display monitor that can display set values and base values is arranged in the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged at the top of the board case. That is, the display monitor is placed in front of the main board 11 in the board case when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is open. This is the front of the pachinko game machine 1, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. In this way, the display monitor is placed in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame open. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The first to fourth display parts of the display monitor are each made up of 7 segments that are made up of 7 segments that form a figure 8, and dots placed at the bottom right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting up or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc., respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

A game information display section may be provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability change lamp, and a time saving lamp are arranged all together. The round display device can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy/high-base state as a time-saving state or a jackpot game state. The variable probability lamp lights up when in a variable probability state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time is being saved. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the most advantageous for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. Further, as for the setting value, the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the value becomes more advantageous for the gaming parlor side. Note that if the ball payout rate changes depending on the setting value, for example, the probability of jackpot may change depending on the setting value, or the jackpot probability may be constant but the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change depending on the setting value. Good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIGS. 16-1(A) and 16-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. Of these, Figure 16-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 16-2 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure. A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used when the figure is the second special figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the winning determination value, which is compared with the random value MR1 for each set value, is set as the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). It is. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. The winning judgment value in the display result judgment table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0 to 65535. The display result judgment table is not limited to using separate display result judgment tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, but a common display result judgment table for the first special figure and the second special figure. A table may also be used.

When the setting value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The range from 1020 to 1237 is assigned to a "big hit", the range from 32767 to 33094 is assigned to a "small win", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to a "loss". When the setting value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for display result judgment is 1020 to 1346. The numbers up to 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers from 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses". When the set value is 1 and the fluctuating special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The range from 1020 to 1237 is assigned to a "big hit", the range from 32767 to 33421 is assigned to a "small win", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to a "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the winning judgment value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. The numbers up to 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers from 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses".

When the setting value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The range from 1020 to 1253 is assigned to a "big hit", the range from 32767 to 33094 is assigned to a "small win", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to a "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to The numbers up to 1383 are assigned as "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned as "small wins", and the other numerical ranges are assigned as "loses". When the setting value is 2 and the fluctuating special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The numbers 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big wins," the numbers 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small wins," and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "losses." When the setting value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the winning judgment value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. The numbers up to 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers from 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses".

When the setting value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The range from 1020 to 1272 is assigned to a "big hit", the range from 32767 to 33094 is assigned to a "small win", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to a "loss". When the setting value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the winning judgment value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. The numbers up to 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers from 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses". When the setting value is 3 and the fluctuating special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The numbers 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big wins," 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small wins," and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses." When the setting value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. The numbers up to 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers from 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The range from 1020 to 1292 is assigned to a "big hit", the range from 32767 to 33094 is assigned to a "small win", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to a "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. The numbers up to 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers from 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The numbers 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big wins," 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small wins," and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "losses." When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the winning judgment value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. The numbers up to 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers from 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The range from 1020 to 1317 is assigned to a "big hit", the range from 32767 to 33094 is assigned to a "small win", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to a "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the winning judgment value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. The numbers up to 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers from 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The numbers 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big wins," 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small wins," and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses." When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the winning judgment value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. The numbers up to 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers from 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The range from 1020 to 1346 is assigned to a "big hit", the range from 32767 to 33094 is assigned to a "small win", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to a "loss". When the setting value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the winning judgment value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. The numbers up to 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers from 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is: The range from 1020 to 1346 is assigned to a "big hit", the range from 32767 to 33421 is assigned to a "small win", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to a "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the winning judgment value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. The numbers up to 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers from 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loses".

In each display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined for the "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to display results. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, the probability determined (for example, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/300, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/280, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/260, and when the setting value is 4, it is 1/ 240, 1/220 if the set value is 5, 1/200 if the set value is 6), the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher. (For example, if the setting value is 1, it will be 1/200; if the setting value is 2, it will be 1/180; if the setting value is 3, it will be 1/160; if the setting value is 4, it will be 1/140; If the setting value is 5, it is 1/120, and if the setting value is 6, it is 1/100). Each display is set so that the probability of controlling to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state) than when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In the result determination table, a determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state.

Depending on each setting value, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is about 1.56 times the jackpot probability in the normal state or time-saving state, and if the setting value is 3, it is about 1.56 times the jackpot probability in the normal state or time-saving state. The magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the probability of jackpot in the variable probability state is 1.625 times). All the magnifications of the jackpot probabilities in may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to the small win game state will be the same regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in Figure 16-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" and a small hit is determined regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability of determining that the game state is controlled is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined by the first feature, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same value, different from those in the graphical display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 16-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" and a small hit is determined regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability of determining that the game state is controlled is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the setting value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of determining a small win game state is the same as a "small win", but the special figure display result is changed according to the setting value. The probability of determining that the small win game state is controlled as a "small win" may be varied. It is not limited to forms in which the probability of being determined is different when controlling the special figure display result as a "small win" according to the fluctuating special figure, and the special figure display result is "small win" regardless of the fluctuating special figure. The probability of controlling to a small winning gaming state as "small winning" may be the same probability.

FIGS. 16-2 to 16-5 show numerical ranges of hit determination values assigned to "big hit" and "small win" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 16-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 16-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is in the variable probability state. FIG. 16-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 16-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is in the variable probability state.

As shown in Figure 16-2, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal or time saving, the range of 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining. When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, Only numbers within the common numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numerical values within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are "jackpot". It is assigned to "Jackpot". The non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is used to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, the hit judgment value from 1020 to 1346 is set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the same as when the setting value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), and is set in the range of 32767 to 33094. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As shown in Figure 16-3, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values determines a jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment value for. When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674. In this way, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical value range While only numbers within (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Assigned. The non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the same as the display result determination table for the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the winning judgment value is Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, the hit judgment value from 1020 to 1674 is set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the same as when the setting value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), and is set in the range of 32767 to 33094. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As shown in Figure 16-4, in the second special figure display result judgment table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 among the hit judgment values is the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining. If the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, Only numbers within the common numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numerical values within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are "jackpot". It is assigned to "Jackpot". The non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is used to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, in this case, the hit judgment value from 1020 to 1346 is set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the jackpot judgment value when the setting value is 6. In a numerical range different from the judgment value range (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and is set in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As shown in Figure 16-5, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values determines a jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment value for. When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is variable probability state, among the winning determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical value range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". It is being The non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, in this case, the hit judgment value from 1020 to 1674 is set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the jackpot judgment value when the setting value is 6. In a numerical range different from the judgment value range (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and is set in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the gaming state and setting value, determination is included within a continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range, based on the hit determination value of 1020. The value is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and regardless of the gaming state and setting value, the judgment value that is included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as a small hit. Variable display results are determined as a numerical range of values.

In each display result judgment table, if the variable special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the gaming state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same). be. In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, while the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is approximately 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and the control will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state is the lowest, and the value of the setting value is 1. The judgment value is assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and the control will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state (Jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting Value 3 > Setting value 2 > Setting value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of the random number MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to a jackpot, the CPU 103 determines a jackpot (jackpot) regarding the special symbol. It is decided that A to jackpot C). Further, when the random number value MR1 matches any hit determination value corresponding to a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. In this way, the winning of the jackpot and small winning is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 16-1 indicates the probability (proportion) of a jackpot and the probability (proportion) of a small win. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to use the jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small win means deciding whether to control to a small win gaming state, but stopping the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small winning symbol.

The setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are 5 or less. The number may be seven or more. The larger the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (such as increasing the jackpot probability or making it easier to determine a specific jackpot type). The smaller the setting value set in machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gameplay itself is not limited to a form where it does not change; The gender may be changed. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of changing the probability is 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is set to a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a certain variable state based on the passing of the jackpot game, while the rate of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different depending on the variable special symbol (so-called V If the setting value set on the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characteristic section regarding the setting value will be explained. FIG. 16-6 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed within the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. For example, in the gaming control main processing shown in FIG. 3, the processing in the gaming control main processing includes setting the stack pointer, setting the built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) ), and initial settings such as setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state are performed.

When the processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the clear switch being operated. (Step S1A). Note that, before the process of step S1A, it is sufficient that a process of clearing a RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition is performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), set the RAM clear flag (step S2A) and proceed to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), proceed to step S2A. The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether the open sensor is ON (step S4A). If the open sensor is ON, that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the gaming machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), check whether the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

If the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a setting value change process (step S6A) is executed to change the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the process proceeds to step S8A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), execute a setting value confirmation process (step S7A) to confirm the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then proceed to the process of step S8A. move on. Note that if the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process directly proceeds to step S8A.

The setting value change process is carried out by turning on the lock switch and clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted after being powered off. This is the process to be performed. The setting value change process includes a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the production control board 12, a process of updating the contents of address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, Depending on the state of the lock switch, processing is performed to update and store the temporary set value as the actual set value at address F000 in the RAM 102, and to transmit a set value change completion notification command to the production control board 12.

The setting value confirmation process is performed by turning on the lock switch 207SG051 (with the clear switch OFF) while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted after being powered off (power cut off). This process is performed by doing this. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the performance control board 12, a display of the set value stored at address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor, and A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of the gaming hall via a terminal board (not shown), which terminates the display etc. according to the state of the lock switch, and sets it to the production control board 12. A process of transmitting a value confirmation completion notification command is performed.

In addition, in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round display are turned on, and the first pending display 25A, By starting the blinking of the second hold indicator 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player or an attendant of the game hall can check from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 whether the pachinko game machine 1 is changing the setting value or not. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being checked. Furthermore, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be in any manner, especially as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be lit in different manners at the start of the setting value change process and at the start of the setting value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not to clear the RAM 102 when starting up the pachinko gaming machine 1 this time (to execute the RAM clearing process (step S9A)). (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), proceed to step S10A after executing RAM clear processing (step S9A); if the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), clear the RAM. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). As other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko game machine 1 was started with a cold start or restored to the state before the power cut (started with a hot start), depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set or not. ), and performs corresponding processing (step S10A), and ends the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the setting values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) where the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. Processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, instead of clearing data other than the set values, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) It is also possible to clear only the gaming information stored in F003 and later of FXXX.

Note that the process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all segments constituting the display monitor over a period of a cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be made to blink, or at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor may be made to light up. In addition, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormal error), or the recovery from a power outage during a setting change, etc. It may also include a process of transmitting an error designation command to the production control board 12 in response to an abnormality in the set value. Furthermore, the first, second, third, and fourth displays that make up the display monitor are used to notify you of the occurrence of a set value abnormality error or recovery from a power outage during setting changes (error notification). A process may be performed to display "E." in each section. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the gaming hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and from then on, the CPU 103 displays information until a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 (until the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by an operation by a clerk at the game parlor, etc.) The occurrence of the error may be notified by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the process within the game control main process, when the lock switch is determined to be ON in step S3A and the open sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being activated, an error designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 12, and an error notification may be made by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a setting value notification command to the production control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by the process of step S10A, regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. As a result, on the production control board 12 side, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed, the setting value can be stored in a specifiable manner. can.

If an abnormal set value is set or if the power is restored from a power outage while changing the set value, the display monitor, first special symbol display device 4A, and second special symbol display device 4B will notify you of the occurrence of an error. By executing this, the staff at the game parlor can recognize from both the front and back sides of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the machine has recovered from a power outage while changing the settings. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or recovery from a power outage while changing setting values. It becomes like this.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. The range is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1 is one of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), a value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuous, with the hit determination value of 1020 being the jackpot reference value. Since the value is set to be within a numerical range, when determining whether or not the jackpot gaming state will be controlled, the value of the random number MR1 must be set from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value. It is only necessary to determine whether the value is within the numerical range up to. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

The numerical range of the jackpot judgment value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value are provided, there is less randomness. There is no need to perform multiple times to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state). This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

As shown in Figure 16-1, in the display result determination table, the jackpot determination value is set to 1020 as the jackpot reference value, regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state. Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the value of the random value MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range according to the normal state or time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the variable state. All you have to do is decide whether or not. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in Figure 16-1, in the display result judgment table, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value depending on whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. are different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table (The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is approximately twice as many).On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to a small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the variable special figure. It is only necessary to determine whether or not. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control the small winning game state.

As shown in Figure 16-1, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table is determined by the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) that is different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled, it is determined whether the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value. When determining whether or not to be controlled to a small hit gaming state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the variable special figure. It is only necessary to determine whether or not. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on which the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the small-win gaming state.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 60AK)
In the feature section 60AK, the number of times notification effect is executed at a predetermined rate during execution of the variable display. In the number of times notification performance, the number of times the operation performance is executed is notified. The operation performance is a performance in which various previews, notifications, and suggestions are made when a player's action, such as a pressing operation of the push button 31B, is detected. The operation performance of the characteristic part 60AK is a preview performance that foretells that the jackpot game state will be controlled, a value notification performance that notifies whether the jackpot game state will be controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, and the pachinko game machine 1. The executable effects include a settings suggestion effect that suggests setting values in .

FIG. 17-1 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S171 of the production control process process as a variable display start setting process regarding the characteristic part 60AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop symbol and the like are determined (step 60AKS011). The final stop symbol is a fixed decorative symbol as a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols, and is a variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or a variable display result notification command. It can be determined based on variable display contents, such as display results. The variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 based on the settings by the variation pattern setting process of the special symbol process process. The variable display contents corresponding to the display results of variable patterns and variable displays are "Non-reach (lose)", "Normal reach (lose)", "Super reach (lose)", "Uncertain change (jackpot)", "Probable change (loss)" It is sufficient if it includes "Jackpot)". If the variable display content is one of "non-reach (lose)", "normal reach (lose)", or "super reach (lose)", it is included in the case where the display result of the variable display is "lose". The case where the variable display content is either "non-probable variable (jackpot)" or "probable variable (jackpot)" is included in the case where the display result of the variable display is "jackpot." In addition, when the variable display content is "normal reach (lose)" and when the variable display content is "super reach (lose)", the variable display content is also collectively referred to as "reach (lose)". When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)" and when the variable display content is "probability variation (jackpot)", the variable display content is collectively referred to as "jackpot".

If the variable display content is "Non-reach (lose)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol will not change to the reach state, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a “lose”. If the variable display content is "Reach (Lose)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the "Reach" state, the determined decorative symbol of the Reach Loss combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be "Lose". becomes. When the variable display content is "Reach (Lose)," if the variable display content is "Normal Reach (Lose)," a reach effect based on the "Normal" variation pattern is executed, and the variable display content is "Super Reach (Lose)." In the case of ``Loss)'', a reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of ``Super'' is executed. If the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display will be "jackpot", and corresponding to the jackpot type "non-probable change", the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state will be shortened. state. When the variable display content is "probable change (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and corresponding to the jackpot type "probable change", the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a definite change state. Become. When the gaming state becomes variable, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" increases, and it becomes easier to control the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state. A gaming value advantageous to the player is provided.

The final stop symbol is determined so that when the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have different (inconsistent) decorative symbols. Ru. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, etc., and referring to the left determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, the determined symbol is determined. Among the decorative patterns, the left fixed decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Next, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and by referring to the right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, the confirmed decoration is Of the symbols, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined ornamental symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined ornamental symbol by setting in the right determined ornamental symbol determination table or the like. Next, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-determined pattern that is updated by the random number circuit 124, etc., and by referring to a medium-determined pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, a determined decoration is created. Among the symbols, a medium determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

The final stop symbol is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the variable display content is "Reach (Lose)". Ru. In this case, by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 124, etc., and referring to the left and right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, the determination is made. Among the decorative patterns, those with the same pattern number that are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-determined pattern that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and by referring to a medium-determined pattern determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, a determined decorative pattern is generated. Of these, it is sufficient to determine the medium-determined decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5. Here, if the determined decorative symbols become a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle determined ornamental symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left determined ornamental symbol and the right determined ornamental symbol, an arbitrary value can be set. (For example, "1") may be added to or subtracted from the pattern number of the medium-determined decorative pattern so that the determined decorative pattern becomes a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

The final stop symbol is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)" or "probability change (jackpot)". The decorative patterns are determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmed symbol determination table prepared in advance and stored in the ROM 121, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. Decorative symbols with the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed at 5C and 5R may be determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probable variable (jackpot)" or "probable variable (jackpot)" and whether or not a jackpot promotion effect is executed, the normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It is only necessary to determine which one of the decorative pattern shown) and the variable probability pattern (for example, the decorative pattern showing an odd number) is to be the fixed decorative pattern. In the jackpot promotion performance, a combination of decorative symbols that evokes a jackpot but does not evoke a variable probability state (non-probable variable jackpot combination) is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, and then is displayed during a jackpot game state or during a jackpot game state. This is an effect that informs whether or not the probability change state will occur at the end of the period.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probable variation (jackpot)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of regular symbols. Further, when the variable display content is "probability variation (jackpot)" and it is decided not to perform the promotion performance during jackpot, one to be the fixed decorative pattern is determined from among the plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, even if the variable display content is "probable change (jackpot)", when it is decided to execute the jackpot medium promotion performance, the one to be the fixed decorative pattern is determined from among the plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though all probability-variable symbols are derived and displayed as confirmed ornamental symbols, promotion performance during a jackpot is prevented from being executed, and the player is prevented from feeling distrustful.

If the variable display content is "non-probability variable (jackpot)" or "probable variable (jackpot)", in step 60AKS011, it is determined whether to execute a variable probability promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a jackpot. It's okay to be hurt. In the re-lottery performance, a decorative pattern of a non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same regular pattern is once displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, making it difficult or impossible to recognize that the variable probability state is controlled. The player can be visually informed that the decorative patterns are variably displayed (re-fluctuated) again and the decorative patterns of the probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same probability variable patterns are stopped and displayed, thereby controlling the probability variable state. In addition, after the decorative symbols are changed again in the re-lottery performance, the decorative symbols of the non-probable variable jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, so that the control to the variable probability state may not be notified. If it is determined in step 60AKS011 to perform the re-lottery performance, the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before executing the re-lottery performance.

After determining the final stop symbol etc., operation performance determination processing is executed (step 60AKS012). Through the operation performance determination process, decisions and settings for executing the operation performance and the number of times notification performance are performed. Then, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step 60AKS013). The performance control pattern may include a special symbol variation performance control pattern, an operation performance control pattern, and other advance notice performance control patterns. For example, in response to a variation pattern indicated by a variation pattern designation command, one of a plurality of prepared special symbol variation performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used. Further, in accordance with the determination result of the operation effect determination process in step 60AKS012, one of the plurality of prepared operation effect control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used. In addition, the production control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation and the operation production control pattern are not limited to those that set separate production control patterns, but one production control pattern that corresponds to the combination of execution settings of each production. There may be. When the production control pattern is determined, for example, an initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (production control timer setting section, etc.) is set in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. (Step 60AKS014). Further, settings are made to start changing decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 60AKS015). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure variation production control pattern) determined in step 60AKS013 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, settings for updating the pending display at the start of the variable display are performed (step 60AKS016). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display area corresponding to the hold number "1" (leftmost display area) is erased (disappeared), and other hold numbers "2" to The pending display in the display area corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) to the left one by one. As a result, the pending display is shifted. The active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5 may display an active display corresponding to the pending display that has been erased (expired) in the pending display area. In addition, if the number of pending memories is "0" and the variable display starts immediately based on the occurrence of the first starting prize or the second starting winning, the active display area will not be updated without updating the pending display. Settings may be made to update the active display in . Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step 60AKS017), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 17-2 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation effect determination process executed in step 60AKS012 of the variable display start setting process. In the operation performance determination process, first, it is determined whether the performance permission condition is satisfied (step 60AKS021). The performance permission condition may be determined in advance as a condition under which execution of the operation performance is permitted. For example, when a reach effect of SP reach, which is a super reach, is executed according to a variation pattern specified by a variation pattern designation command, the effect permission condition may be satisfied. Moreover, being in a high-accuracy-high base state in a probability-variable state may be one of the performance permission conditions. In this way, when the SP reach effect is executed in the high-accuracy, high-base state, the effect permission condition only needs to be satisfied.

In the feature section 60AK, SP reach A and SP reach B are prepared in advance as super reach effects. Each reach performance may include performances that have different performance modes from each other. Each reach performance may include a performance with a common performance mode. When the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", the ratio of executing the reach effect of super reach is higher than the rate of execution of the reach effect of normal reach. In addition, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot", the ratio of executing the SP reach B reach effect becomes higher than the rate of executing the SP reach A reach effect. When the display result of the variable display is "lose", the ratio of normal reach reach performance is higher than the ratio of execution of super reach reach performance. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "lose", the ratio of executing the SP reach-A reach effect is higher than the ratio of executing the SP reach-B reach effect. Due to the execution ratio of these reach effects, among the reach effects of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, the reach effect of SP reach B was executed more than when the reach effect of SP reach A was executed. In this case, the expectation of winning the jackpot increases.

If the performance permission condition is not satisfied in step 60AKS021 (step 60AKS021; No), the operation performance determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the performance permission condition is satisfied (step 60AKS021; Yes), the presence or absence of operation performance and the number of times are determined (step 60AKS022). The operation performance is executed depending on whether or not to be performed, by referring to the operation performance execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the execution of the operation performance. What is necessary is to determine the presence or absence of the program and the number of times the program is executed. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the operation effect may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In step 60 AKS022, the presence or absence of operation effects and the number of times are set to ``no execution'' in which the operation effect is not performed, "execution 5 times" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 5 times, or the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times. One of "10 executions" is determined.

Based on the determination result in step 60AKS022, it is determined whether "no execution" has been determined in which the operation effect is not performed (step 60AKS023). If it is determined that there is no execution (step 60AKS023; Yes), the operation effect determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "no execution" (step 60AKS023; No), it is determined whether the display result of the variable display is "jackpot" (step 60AKS024). If it is determined that it is a "big hit" (step 60AKS024; Yes), the number of setting suggestions is determined (step 60AKS025). The setting suggestion count indicates the number of times an operation performance is executed as a setting suggestion performance among a plurality of operation performances. In step 60AKS025, the number of setting suggestions is determined by referring to a setting suggestion number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the number of setting suggestions. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of setting suggestions may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In step 60AKS025, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable", the number of setting suggestions is determined to be 0. If the jackpot type is "probable", it depends on whether it is a "5-time execution" case where the number of executions of the operation effect is 5 times, or a "10-time execution" case where the number of executions is 10 times. The number of setting suggestions is determined at different ratios.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the determination result at step 60AKS025 is 0 (step 60AKS026). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS026; No), a setting suggestion pattern is determined (step 60AKS027). The setting suggestion pattern is determined for each number of executions of the operation performance by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. Any one of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

If the determination result in step 60AKS025 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS026; Yes), or after the setting suggestion pattern is determined in step 60AKS027, the number of value notifications is determined (step 60AKS028). The value notification count indicates the number of times an operation performance is executed as a value notification performance among a plurality of operation performances. In step 60AKS028, the number of value notifications is determined by referring to a value notification number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the number of value notifications. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of value notifications may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In step 60AKS028, the value is set at different rates depending on whether the number of executions of the operation effect is 5 times (5 times execution) or 10 times (10 times execution). The number of notifications is determined.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the determination result at step 60AKS028 is 0 (step 60AKS029). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS029; No), a value notification pattern is determined (step 60AKS030). The value notification pattern is determined as one of the multiple value notification patterns for each number of executions of the operation performance based on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable variable” or “probable variable”. All you have to do is make it happen.

If it is determined in step 60AKS024 that the display result of the variable display is not a "jackpot" (step 60AKS024; No), or if the determination result in step 60AKS028 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS029; Yes), or After determining the value notification pattern in step 60AKS030, the number of times of preview performance is set (step 60AKS031). The number of preview performances indicates the number of times the operation performance is executed as a preview performance among the plurality of operation performances. For example, if the display result of the variable display is "Loss", the value notification performance and setting suggestion performance will not be executed, so the number of executions of the operation performance may be directly set as the number of preview performances. When the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", the remaining number of times the setting suggestion number and the value notification number are subtracted from the number of execution times of the operation performance may be set as the number of preview performance times. After step 60AKS031, a preview performance pattern is determined (step 60AKS032), and the operation performance determination process is ended. The preview performance pattern is determined each time the operation performance is executed by referring to a preview performance pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the preview performance pattern. Any one of the plurality of preview performance patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the preview performance pattern may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 17-3 shows an example of determining whether or not to perform an operation performance and the number of times in step 60AKS022 of the operation performance determination process. In step 60AKS022 of the operation performance determination process, the presence or absence of operation performance and the number of times are determined, for example, at a rate according to the content of the ready-to-reach performance. The content of the reach performance is determined according to the variable pattern and the display result of the variable display, and includes "SP reach A (jackpot)", "SP reach B (jackpot)", "SP reach A (loss)", "SP reach It is sufficient if it includes "B (loss)". When the reach effect content is either "SP reach A (jackpot)" or "SP reach B (jackpot)", this is included when the display result of the variable display is "jackpot". If the reach effect content is either "SP reach A (lose)" or "SP reach B (lose)", this is included in the case where the display result of the variable display is "lose". When the reach performance content is either "SP reach A (jackpot)" or "SP reach A (loss)", the SP reach A reach performance is executed as the super reach performance. When the reach performance content is either "SP reach B (jackpot)" or "SP reach B (loss)", the SP reach B reach performance is executed as the super reach performance.

In the decision example shown in Figure 17-3, when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", the number of times the operation effect is executed is increased to 5 times at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is a "loss". ``Execution 5 times'' is determined, or ``Execution 10 times'' is determined, where the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)" or "SP reach B (lose)", the determination ratio of "no execution" in which the operation effect is not performed is 50/100. On the other hand, when the ready-to-reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of "no execution" in which no operation performance is performed is 20/100. Thereby, when the operation performance is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state is increased, and the jackpot expectation level becomes higher than when the operation performance is not executed.

In the determination example shown in Figure 17-3, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the number of times the operation effect is executed is set to 10 times at a higher rate than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. "Execute 10 times" is determined. For example, when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" where the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 is 40/100. On the other hand, when the ready-to-reach performance content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" where the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 is 60/100. Further, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" where the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 is 10/100. On the other hand, when the ready-to-reach performance content is "SP reach B (lose)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" where the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 is 20/100. Among the reach performances of super reach, when the reach performance of SP reach B is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed. Therefore, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is greater than 5 times, the proportion of SP reach B reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than SP reach A reach effect, is executed, and the game This effectively increases people's expectations. Furthermore, as the number of times the operation effect is executed increases, the proportion of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state increases, and the expectation of a jackpot increases.

FIG. 17-4 shows an example of determining the number of setting suggestions in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. Of these, FIG. 17-4(A) shows an example of determining the number of setting suggestions in the case of "execution 5 times" where the number of executions of the operation performance is 5 times. FIG. 17-4(B) shows an example of determining the number of setting suggestions in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 times. In step 60AKS025 of the operation performance determination process, the number of setting suggestions is determined at a rate according to the number of executions of the operation performance and the type of jackpot. The jackpot types include ``non-probable variable'' when the game is not controlled to a variable probability state, and ``probable variable'' when controlled to a variable probability state, depending on the gaming state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When the variable display is controlled to a variable probability state, the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" at a higher rate than when it is not controlled to a variable probability state, and it is easy for the player to be controlled again to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state. Advantageous gaming value is given.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 17-4, when the jackpot type is "probable variable", it is determined that the setting suggestion performance can be executed at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable". For example, in both the case of "5 times execution" and the case of "10 times execution", if the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", the decision ratio of setting the number of setting suggestions to 0 is 100/100, and the setting suggestion number is 0. Suggestive performance is not executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "probable variable", the setting suggestion number can be determined to be a value other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "5 times execution" and the case of "10 times execution". More specifically, in the case of "5 times execution", if the jackpot type is "probable variation", the decision ratio for setting the number of setting suggestions to be 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio for setting the number of setting suggestions to 1 is 70/100. It is 30/100. In the case of "10 executions", if the jackpot type is "probable variation", the decision ratio when the number of setting suggestions is 0 is 10/100, and the decision ratio when the number of setting suggestions is 1 is 15/100. , the decision ratio when the number of setting suggestions is 2 is 20/100, the decision ratio when the number of setting suggestions is 3 is 25/100, and the decision ratio when the number of setting suggestions is 4 is 30/100. Therefore, when the number of executions of the operation presentation is 10 times, which is greater than 5 times, the number of times of setting suggestion is set to other than 0, and the rate at which the setting suggestion presentation is executed is increased. In addition, if the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to decide between 2 and 4, which is the number of setting suggestions that would not be determined in the case of 5 times, and more setting suggestions can be made. The rate at which the performance is performed is increased.

In this way, when the jackpot type is "probable variation", it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects at a higher rate than "non-probable variation", so it is a jackpot type that has a higher advantage than when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation". In the case of "probability change", in response to being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it becomes possible to execute an operation performance that becomes a setting suggestion performance at a high rate. In addition, among multiple types of jackpot game states such as ``non-probable variable'' or ``probable variable'' jackpot type, only in the case of ``probable variable'' which is the jackpot type with the highest advantage, an operation performance that becomes a setting suggestion performance is performed. become executable. Among the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, within the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "probable change" jackpot type with a high advantage, an operation performance that becomes a setting suggestion performance at a predetermined rate can be executed. A limit may be set such that an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance is not executed within the range where the jackpot game state is controlled to correspond to the jackpot type "non-probability variation" with a low advantage. Alternatively, among multiple types of jackpot gaming states, within the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "probability variation" of the jackpot type with a high advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance at a high rate. On the other hand, within the range where the jackpot gaming state is controlled to correspond to the "non-probability variation" of the jackpot type with low advantage, a limit is set in which an operation performance that becomes a setting suggestion performance can be executed at a low rate. You can.

FIG. 17-5 shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this configuration example, setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. Suggestion contents and corresponding characters are determined to be different depending on a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content is the content of the setting value suggested according to the production mode of the setting suggestion production. The corresponding character is a character indicated by the effect image displayed when the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC1, in response to a case where the setting value is an odd number and the expectation level is high, the suggestion content is "high expectation level for odd number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH1. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, corresponding to the case where the expectation level is high when the setting value is an even number, the suggestion content is "high expectation level for even number setting" and the corresponding character is character CH2. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC3, corresponding to the case where the expectation level is high with a high setting (large value), the suggestion content is "high expectation level with high setting" and the corresponding character is character CH3. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, in response to the case where the setting value is determined to be 2 or more, the suggestion content is "setting value is determined to be 2 or more" and the corresponding character is character CH4. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, corresponding to the case where the setting value is determined to be the highest value of 6, the suggestion content is "highest setting value is determined" and the corresponding character is character CH5. In this way, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 makes it possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is the most advantageous for the player.

FIG. 17-6 shows an example of determining the setting suggestion pattern in step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process. Among these, FIG. 17-6(A) shows an example of determination when the operation performance is the final operation performance in a plurality of operation performances. Figure 17-6 (B1) and Figure 17-6 (B2) show an example of determination when the operation performance is other than the final one in multiple operation performances, and Figure 17-6 (B1) shows the setting suggestion pattern. This is an example of determination when 60AKC4 has not been determined as a usage pattern, and FIG. 17-6 (B2) is an example of determination when setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined as a usage pattern. In step 60AKS027 of the operation performance determination process, setting suggestion patterns to be used patterns are determined from the last operation performance to the previous operation performance at a ratio according to the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Here, in the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, when the setting value is 6, the decision ratio is 5/100, and in other cases, the decision ratio is 0/100. It becomes impossible to decide. Therefore, when an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed multiple times, the setting suggestion performance based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 that suggests that the setting value is the most advantageous to the player is the final operation performance. It is executed at a predetermined rate as an operation effect, and is not executed as an operation performance other than the final episode. As a result, between the first timing and the second timing at which multiple setting suggestion effects can be executed, the second timing, which is slower than the first timing, has a higher rate of advantage for the player than the first timing. It becomes possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is the highest setting value.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 17-6, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100 when the setting value is 2 or more corresponding to the final operation performance. In addition, in response to operation performances other than the final time, if the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is undetermined, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100 when the setting value is 2 or more. On the other hand, if the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined in response to an operation performance other than the final episode, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 will be 0/100 and it will not be possible to decide, regardless of the setting value. . Therefore, when an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed multiple times, the setting suggestion performance according to the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is executed once at a predetermined ratio as any operation performance, and then executed again or repeatedly in the same manner. to prevent it from happening. In this way, when an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed multiple times, in a range where the setting suggestion performance based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has not yet been executed, the setting suggestion performance based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is performed at a predetermined rate. becomes executable.

On the other hand, when an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed multiple times, the setting suggestion performance based on the same setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 will not be executed in the range where the setting suggestion performance based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been executed. A limit is set. In addition, since the setting suggestion performance using the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can only be executed as the final operation performance, if an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance multiple times is executed, it can be executed as the final setting suggestion performance. In the range where the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed at a predetermined rate, while in the range where the setting suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect other than the final episode, the setting suggestion effect based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is not executed. Limitations are provided as limitations. In this way, when an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed multiple times, the setting suggestion performance based on the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 is executed at a predetermined ratio within the range where it is executed as a single setting suggestion performance. While it is possible to perform this, there is a limit that it cannot be performed in the range where it is performed multiple times as a setting suggestion performance. When an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance is performed multiple times, among the setting suggestion performances based on the multiple setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5, within the range of setting suggestion performances based on the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC3, the settings suggestion performance is executed in the same manner. While the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 may be executed, there is a limit that the setting suggestion effects are never executed in the same manner.

FIG. 17-7 shows an example of determining the number of value notifications in step 60AKS028 of the operation performance determination process. Of these, FIG. 17-7(A) shows an example of determining the number of times of value notification in the case of "execution 5 times" where the number of times the operation performance is performed is 5 times. FIG. 17-7(B) shows an example of determining the number of times of value notification in the case of "10 times execution" where the number of times the operation performance is performed is 10 times. In step 60AKS028 of the operation performance determination process, the number of times of value notification is determined in accordance with the number of times the operation performance is executed and the number of setting suggestions. The setting suggestion number is determined by step 60 AKS025 of the operation performance determination process to 0 or 1 if the number of executions of the operation performance is "executed 5 times", and is determined to be 0 or 1 if the number of executions of the operation performance is "executed 10 times". -4 is determined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 17-7, the value notification count is determined so that the value notification effect is executed when the setting suggestion count is other than 0. For example, in the case of "Execute 5 times", if the number of setting suggestions is 1, the decision ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 100/100, and one value notification effect is always executed. In the case of "10 times execution", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0 (one of 1 to 4), the value notification number is determined to be one of 1 to 4 at a predetermined ratio. More specifically, in the case of "10 executions", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0, the decision ratio of setting the value notification number to 1 is 55/100, and the decision ratio of setting the value notification number to 2 is 55/100. The ratio is 20/100, the ratio of determining the number of value notifications to 3 is 15/100, and the ratio of determining the number of value notifications to 4 is 10/100. Therefore, when the value notification performance notifies the player as to whether or not a gaming value advantageous to the player will be awarded, the setting suggestion performance can provide a suggestion regarding the setting value. The setting suggestion performance can be executed at a predetermined rate when the jackpot game state is controlled to correspond to "probability change" of the jackpot type with high advantage among the plurality of types of jackpot game states. In this case, the value notification performance notifies the player that a gaming value that is advantageous to the player will be provided, and the setting suggestion performance can provide a suggestion regarding the setting value. As a result, the operation performance that becomes the setting suggestion performance can be executed at a predetermined rate within the range where the operation performance that becomes the value notification performance is executed, while the operation performance that becomes the value notification performance is executed at a predetermined rate. There is a limit to the extent to which it will not be possible. It should be noted that the operation performance that becomes a setting suggestion performance can be executed at a high rate in the range where the operation performance that becomes the value information performance is executed, but at a low rate in the range where the operation performance that becomes the value information performance is not executed. A limit may be set as a limit to what can be done.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 17-7, the value notification count is determined so as to provide a case where the value notification performance is not executed when the setting suggestion count is 0. For example, in the case of "Execute 5 times", if the number of setting suggestions is 0, the decision ratio to set the value notification number to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio to set the value notification number to 1 is 30/100. be. In the case of "10 executions", if the setting suggestion number is 0, the decision ratio of setting the value notification number to 0 is 10/100, and the decision ratio of setting the value notification number of times to 1 is 15/100, The determination ratio where the number of value notifications is 2 is 20/100, the determination ratio where the number of value notifications is 3 is 25/100, and the determination ratio where the number of value notifications is 4 is 30/100. As a result, when the operation presentation is executed multiple times, the operation presentation that becomes the setting suggestion presentation or value notification presentation is not executed, and the display result of the variable display is changed to “Jackpot” after the execution of the operation presentation ends. ” can be provided. Therefore, even if the number of executions of the operation effect reaches the number of times notified by the number notification effect and the execution of the operation effect ends while the variable display is being executed, there is a possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from being lost due to the end of the operation performance.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 17-7, the number of value notifications can be determined to be other than 0 at a rate depending on the case of "execution 5 times" and the case of "execution 10 times." When the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 times, which is greater than 5 times, the number of times of value notification may be set to other than 0 so that the rate at which the value notification performance is executed is increased. For example, in the case of "Execute 5 times", the ratio of setting suggestion frequency being determined to 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestion number being determined to 1 other than 0 in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. On the other hand, in the case of "10 times execution", the ratio of the setting suggestion number being determined to be 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestion number being determined to 0 in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. In the case of "Execute 5 times", step 60AKS028 of the operation performance determination process determines that if the setting suggestion number is 0, the ratio of the value notification number being determined to 0 is higher than the ratio of the number of value notifications being determined to 1 other than 0. expensive. In the case of "10 executions", in step 60AKS028 of the operation performance determination process, even if the setting suggestion number is 0, the ratio of value notification times being determined to be other than 0 is higher than the ratio of value notification times being determined to 0. . With these settings, in the case of "Execute 10 times", which has a higher number of executions of the operation effect than "Execute 5 times", the rate at which the value notification number is determined to be other than 0 increases, and the value notification effect is executed. This will increase the proportion of In addition, if the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 times, which is greater than 5 times, it is possible to determine the number of value notifications from 2 to 4, which is the number of value notifications that would not be determined in the case of 5 times, and more value notifications. What is necessary is to increase the rate at which the performance is performed.

According to steps 60AKS025 and 60AKS028 of the operation performance determination process, in the case of "5 times execution", both the setting suggestion number and the value notification number are determined to be 0, and there is a high probability that neither the setting suggestion performance nor the value notification performance will be executed. In the case of "10 executions", both the number of setting suggestions and the number of value notifications are determined to be other than 0, and the rate at which both the setting suggestion performance and the value notification performance are executed becomes high. In this way, as the number of executions of the operation performance increases, the rate at which the setting suggestion performance and the value notification performance are executed may be increased. Furthermore, when the number of times the operation performance is executed is a predetermined number or more, the setting suggestion performance and the value notification performance may be executed at a higher rate than when the number is less than the predetermined number. Thereby, the player's expectations for the setting suggestion performance and the value notification performance can be varied depending on the number of times the operation performance is executed.

FIG. 17-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S172 of the performance control process process as the variable display performance process regarding the characteristic part 60AK. In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not a special figure fluctuation time, which is a variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed, based on the timer value of the performance control process timer, for example (step 60AKS041). At this time, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, subtracted by 1), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the updated production control process timer value, the variable display time is It may be determined that the period has passed. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 60AKS041; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, etc. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, turned off, or blinked. It is only necessary that a predetermined performance device can perform various performances by operating a movable member for performance, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance processing shown in FIG. 17-8, it is determined whether or not it is the number of times notification performance period (step 60AKS042). The number of times notification performance period may be determined in advance in the performance control pattern (operation performance control pattern, etc.) determined, for example, in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. If it is determined that it is the number of times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the number of times notification effect (step 60AKS043). The control in step 60AKS043 makes it possible to execute a number-of-times notification performance that is notified corresponding to the number of times the operation performance is performed.

If it is determined in step 60AKS042 that it is not the number of times notification performance period (step 60AKS042; No), or after performing the control in step 60AKS043, it is determined whether or not it is the preview performance period (step 60AKS044). The preview performance period may be determined in advance in the performance control pattern (operation performance control pattern, preview performance control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The preview performance period corresponding to the operation performance may be predetermined so as to be later than the number of times notification performance period. If it is determined that it is the preview performance period (step 60AKS044; Yes), control is performed to execute the preview performance (step 60AKS045). The control in step 60AKS045 makes it possible to execute an operation performance that becomes a preview performance.

If it is determined in step 60AKS044 that it is not the preview performance period (step 60AKS044; No), or after performing the control in step 60AKS045, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-reach performance period (step 60AKS046). The ready-to-reach performance period may be determined in advance, for example, in the performance control pattern (such as the special symbol variation performance control pattern) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The reach performance period may be set to be later than the preview performance period, or may be determined to include at least a part of the preview performance period. If it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046; Yes), control is performed to execute the ready-to-win effect (step 60AKS047). By the control in step 60AKS047, the ready-to-reach effect becomes executable.

If it is determined in step 60AKS046 that it is not the reach effect period (step 60AKS046; No), or after performing the control in step 60AKS047, it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048). The jackpot notification period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern during special symbol fluctuation, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The jackpot notification period may be predetermined so as to be later than the reach effect period. If it is determined that it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048; Yes), control is performed to execute a jackpot notification effect (step 60AKS049). The control in step 60AKS049 makes it possible to notify that the jackpot game state is controlled as an advantageous state during a predetermined period while the variable display is being executed.

If it is determined in step 60AKS048 that it is not the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048; No), or after performing the control in step 60AKS049, it is determined whether or not it is the value notification presentation period (step 60AKS050). The value notification performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (operation performance control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The value notification performance period may be set to be later than the jackpot notification period, or may be set to include at least a part of the jackpot notification period. If it is determined that it is the value notification performance period (step 60AKS050; Yes), control is performed to execute the value notification performance (step 60AKS051). The control in step 60AKS051 makes it possible to execute the operation performance that becomes the value notification performance.

If it is determined in step 60AKS050 that it is not the value notification performance period (step 60AKS050; No), or after performing the control in step 60AKS051, it is determined whether or not it is the setting suggestion performance period (step 60AKS052). The setting suggestion performance period may be determined in advance, for example, in the jackpot performance control pattern. The setting suggestion presentation period may be set to be later than the value notification presentation period. If it is determined that it is the setting suggestion performance period (step 60AKS052; Yes), control is performed to execute the setting suggestion performance (step 60AKS053). The control in step 60AKS053 makes it possible to execute an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance. If it is determined in step 60AKS052 that it is not the setting suggestion production period (step 60AKS052; No), or after performing the control in step 60AKS053, for example, the settings in the production control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern, etc. Based on this, other controls are performed to execute effects during variable display, including variable display operations of decorative symbols (step 60 AKS054), and then the process for effect during variable display is ended.

If it is determined in step 60AKS041 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 60AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 60AKS055). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 60AKS055; No), the variable display performance process is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time has elapsed, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving a symbol confirmation command, a predetermined error process will be executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may also do so. If the symbol confirmation command is received (step 60 AKS055; Yes), the display result is obtained in the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) (step 60AKS056). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as a waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 60AKS057). Furthermore, after updating the value of the production process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step 60AKS058), the variable display production process is ended.

FIG. 17-9 shows execution periods and execution timings of various effects regarding the feature section 60AK. Of these, FIG. 17-9(A) shows the execution period and execution timing for variable display related performances including the mode of variable display of decorative symbols. FIG. 17-9(B) shows execution periods and execution timings for operation-related performances including number-of-time notification performances and operation performances. When the variable display starts at timing T0, the number of times notification effect period begins. In the number-of-times notification performance period, the number-of-times notification performance is executed by control in step 60AKS043 of the variable display performance process.

Thereafter, when the number-of-times notification performance period ends at timing T1, a preview performance period begins. During the preview performance period, the control in step 60AKS045 of the variable display performance processing allows the operation performance to be executed as the preview performance. For example, when an operation performance that is a multiple preview performance is executed, each preview performance included in the multiple preview performances, such as the first preview, second preview, etc., is executed in order. . The preview performance period is not only the period in which the pre-reach variation occurs before the variable display mode of the decorative symbol changes to the reach mode, but also the period after the variation after the reach mode occurs after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol changes to the reach mode. A portion of the period may be included. By executing the operation performance that becomes the preview performance during the preview performance period, the display result of the variable display is determined to be a "jackpot" based on the detection of the player's action, such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B. It becomes possible to perform performances that foretell what will happen.

In the variable display of decorative symbols, for example, a jackpot notification is executed at timing T2 as the determined decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed. In the variable display performance processing, when it is determined in step 60AKS048 that it is the jackpot notification period, the jackpot notification performance becomes executable by the control in step 60AKS049. At this time, it is the value notification presentation period. During the value notification performance period, the control in step 60AKS051 of the variable display performance process allows the operation performance to be executed as the value notification performance. For example, when an operation performance that results in multiple value notification performances is executed, each value notification performance included in the multiple value notification performances, such as the first notification, second notification, etc., is executed in order. executed. By executing the operation performance that becomes the value notification performance during the value notification performance period, based on the detection of the player's movement, such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, the probability change state is established after the end of the jackpot game state. It becomes possible to execute an effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled.

Subsequently, special time notification is executed at timing T3, and a setting suggestion presentation period begins. During the setting suggestion performance period, the control in step 60AKS053 of the variable display performance process makes it possible to execute the operation performance that becomes the setting suggestion performance. For example, when an operation performance that includes multiple setting suggestion performances is executed, each setting suggestion performance included in the multiple setting suggestion performances, such as the first suggestion, second suggestion, etc., is performed in order. executed. By executing the operation performance serving as the setting suggestion performance during the setting suggestion performance period, information regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined based on the detection of a player's action, such as a pressing operation of the push button 31B. It becomes possible to carry out productions that make suggestions. Thereafter, when timing T4 is reached, the variable display ends, the jackpot starts, and control of the jackpot game state is started.

In this way, when a plurality of operation performances are performed, a number-of-times notification performance period, a preview performance period, a value notification performance period, and a setting suggestion performance period can be provided. In the number-of-times notification performance period, a number-of-times notification performance is performed in which a notification corresponding to the number of times the operation performance is performed is performed. In the advance notice performance period, an operation performance is executed which is a notice performance that foretells that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In the value notification performance period, an operation performance is executed as a value notification performance to notify whether or not the control is to be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. In the setting suggestion performance period, an operation performance serving as a setting suggestion performance that provides a suggestion regarding a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. Note that if the number of value notifications is 0, no value notification performance period may be provided, and if the number of setting suggestions is 0, no setting suggestion performance period may be provided.

The preview performance period and the value notification performance period are included in the predetermined period during which the operation performance can be executed. The setting suggestion performance period is included in a specific period during which the operation performance can be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The value notification performance period starts when the jackpot notification is performed at timing T2. The jackpot notification by the jackpot notification performance makes it possible to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled for a predetermined period. The setting suggestion performance becomes executable as an operation performance in the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after a predetermined period has elapsed when a jackpot notification is performed at timing T2.

In step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, when the jackpot type is "probable variable", the setting suggestion number is determined to be other than 0 at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable", and the setting suggestion effect is set. Determined to be practicable. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the number of setting suggestions is other than 0, the number of value notifications is determined to be other than 0, and the value notification effect is determined to be executable. Therefore, in response to being controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot type "probable variation" with a high advantage among the plurality of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probable variation" or "probable variation" jackpot type, When a value notification effect controls a jackpot gaming state with a high advantage, the predetermined period of time passes at a higher rate than when a notification controls a jackpot gaming state with a low advantage. In a later specific period, the setting suggestion performance can be executed as an operation performance of the suggestion performance mode.

Even if operation performances such as a preview performance or a value notification performance are made executable during a predetermined period, once these operation performances are finished, it becomes difficult to increase a player's sense of expectation after the predetermined period has elapsed. In contrast, in the present invention, the setting suggestion performance can be executed as an operation performance in the suggestion performance mode during a specific period after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, so even after the operation performance as a preview performance or a value notification performance has ended. , it is possible to improve the game's interest by diversifying the effects so that the user expects the operation effect of the suggested effect mode.

Further, in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, only when the jackpot type is "probable variable", the setting suggestion number is determined to be other than 0, and the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executable. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the number of setting suggestions is other than 0, the number of value notifications is determined to be other than 0, and the value notification effect is determined to be executable. Therefore, among multiple types of jackpot gaming states where the jackpot type is "non-probable" or "probable", depending on the jackpot gaming state being controlled to the jackpot gaming state that corresponds to the "probable" jackpot type with the highest advantage. , Only when the value notification performance controls the jackpot gaming state with the highest advantage, the setting suggestion performance can be executed as an operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after a predetermined period has elapsed. Become.

In general, after the notification that controls the game to a jackpot gaming state with a high degree of advantage is given, it becomes difficult to further increase the player's expectations. In contrast, the present invention makes it possible to execute a setting suggestion performance as an operation performance of the suggestion performance mode during a specific period after a predetermined period has elapsed, and provides a case where a suggestion regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made. Even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game's interest so that the player expects the operation presentation in the suggested presentation mode.

FIGS. 17-10 and 17-11 show examples of execution of operation effects. In this execution example, the number of executions of the operation effect is determined to be 10 times, that is, "execution 10 times", and both the number of value notifications and the number of setting suggestions are determined to be two. Therefore, after the operation performance serving as the preview performance is executed six times, the preview performance period ends and the jackpot notification is performed. FIG. 17-10(A) shows a performance execution example 60AKD1 when a jackpot notification is executed by the jackpot notification performance. At this time, a jackpot notification performance including displaying a message such as "Battle victory!" and displaying a performance image showing a character is executed. In addition, a normal symbol indicating the number "6" is displayed as a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A performance image indicating "4 remaining operations" is also displayed as the remaining number of times the operation performance is to be performed. When such a decorative pattern of a non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed, it gives the impression that the jackpot type is controlled to a jackpot gaming state corresponding to "non-probable variable" and not controlled to a variable probability state. , given to the player.

FIG. 17-10(B) shows a performance execution example 60AKD2 when the value notification performance period is started. At this time, a message is displayed that suggests 4, which is the remaining number of operation performances, as the number of times the operation performance can be executed as the value notification performance. FIG. 17-10(C) shows a performance execution example 60AKD3 when the first value notification performance is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image showing the push button 31B, the player is prompted to perform an action such as a pressing operation on the push button 31B. FIG. 17-10(D) shows an example of performance execution 60AKD4 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first value notification performance. Here, based on the detection of the player's action of pressing the push button 31B, notification that the jackpot type is "probable variable" is not performed, so that after the jackpot gaming state ends, the variable probability state A failure notification effect is executed that gives the impression that the failure is not controlled. In addition, an effect image indicating "3 remaining operations" is displayed as the remaining number of times the operation effect is to be performed.

FIG. 17-10(E) shows a performance execution example 60AKD5 when the second value notification performance is started. At this time, similarly to the case where the first value notification performance is started, a performance image showing the push button 31B is displayed to prompt the player to perform an operation such as pressing the push button 31B. FIG. 17-10(F) shows a performance execution example 60AKD6 when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second value notification performance. Here, based on the detection of the player's action of pressing the push button 31B, a notification that the jackpot type is "probable variable" is made, so that after the jackpot gaming state ends, the variable probability state is changed. A success notification effect is executed to notify that the device is being controlled. In addition, as a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the normal pattern showing the number "6" becomes the variable pattern showing the number "7". changed and displayed. When such a decorative pattern of a variable probability jackpot combination consisting of the same variable probability symbols is displayed, the jackpot type is controlled to a jackpot gaming state corresponding to "variable probability", and the player is informed that the jackpot game state is controlled to a variable probability state. becomes recognizable. In addition, an effect image indicating "two remaining operations" is displayed as the remaining number of times the operation effect is to be performed.

FIG. 17-10(G) shows an example of performance execution 60AKD7 when the setting suggestion performance period is started. At this time, in addition to notifying the special time, a message is displayed notifying the remaining number of operation effects, 2, as the number of times the operation effect, which is the setting suggestion effect, can be executed.

FIG. 17-11(A) shows a performance execution example 60AKD8 when the first setting suggestion performance is started. In this case, by displaying a performance image showing the push button 31B together with a performance image corresponding to the setting suggestion performance, the player's action, such as a pressing operation on the push button 31B, is encouraged. FIG. 17-11(B) shows a production execution example 60AKD9 when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first setting suggestion production. In this case, as a setting suggestion effect based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, an effect image showing the character CH2, which is the corresponding character, is displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the characters CH1 to CH5, which are the corresponding characters of the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5, in order on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to display the advantages according to the characters indicated by the displayed effect images. , the player can recognize it.

FIG. 17-11(C) shows a production execution example 60AKD10 when the second setting suggestion production is started. At this time, similarly to the case where the first setting suggestion performance is started, a performance image corresponding to the setting suggestion performance and a performance image showing the push button 31B are displayed, and the player performs a pressing operation on the push button 31B. This action is encouraged. FIG. 17-11(D) shows an example of performance execution 60AKD11 when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second setting suggestion performance. In this case, as a setting suggestion effect based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, an effect image showing the character CH4, which is the corresponding character, is displayed. FIG. 17-11(E) shows a performance execution example 60AKD12 when the setting suggestion performance period ends. At this time, the display result of the corresponding character in the setting suggestion performance that has already been executed may be displayed so that the player can recognize it. FIG. 17-11(F) shows an example of production execution 60AKD13 in the case of stopping and displaying a decorative pattern of a probability variable jackpot combination that becomes a confirmed decorative pattern in response to the end of the variable display. Thereafter, control of the jackpot game state is started based on the display result of the variable display becoming "jackpot".

This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but it is possible to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also include a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, instead of the determination example shown in Figure 17-4, for example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable", the setting suggestion effect is set at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "probable". may be determined to be executable. In the determination example shown in FIG. 17-4, the number of setting suggestions may be determined based on the ratio when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable" and "probable variable". In this way, if it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable" than when the jackpot type is "probable variable", it will be possible to perform setting suggestion effects at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "probable variable". In the case of a certain "non-probability change", in response to being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it becomes possible to execute an operation performance that becomes a setting suggestion performance at a high rate. In addition, among the multiple types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the operation performance becomes a setting suggestion production only when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", which is the jackpot type with the lowest advantage. may be made executable. In these cases as well, it is possible to improve the game's interest by diversifying the presentation so that the player expects the operation presentation in the suggested presentation mode.

As a plurality of types of advantageous states with different advantage degrees, instead of a jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot type is "non-probable variable" or "probable variable", it may be possible to control jackpot gaming states with different numbers of rounds. For example, jackpot types depending on the number of rounds, such as "4R" where the number of rounds is 4, "6R" where the number of rounds is 6, "8R" where the number of rounds is 8, and "10R" where the number of rounds is 10. may be provided. In this case, as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire increases, so it is only necessary that the player's advantage becomes higher. The value notification performance may be a performance that notifies the player of the number of prize balls that can be acquired according to the number of rounds. In such a case, in response to being controlled to a jackpot gaming state with a high advantage among multiple types of jackpot gaming states, the value notification effect will notify that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state with a high advantage. If this is done, the set suggestion performance is set as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the elapse of a predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification is controlled to a jackpot gaming state with a low advantage. Just make it executable. In addition, in response to being controlled to the jackpot gaming state with the highest advantage among the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, a value notification performance was performed to notify that the jackpot gaming state was controlled to the jackpot gaming state with the highest advantage. Only in this case, setting suggestion performance may be made executable as an operation performance of the suggestion performance mode during a specific period after a predetermined period has elapsed. In these cases as well, it is possible to improve the game's interest by diversifying the presentation so that the player expects the operation presentation in the suggested presentation mode.

On the other hand, in response to being controlled to a jackpot gaming state with a lower advantage among the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, a value notification performance was performed to notify that the jackpot gaming state was controlled to a less advantageous jackpot gaming state. In this case, the set suggestion performance can be executed as an operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the elapse of a predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification is performed that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state with a high advantage. You can. Alternatively, in response to being controlled to the jackpot gaming state with the lowest advantage among the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, a value notification performance is performed to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state with the lowest advantage. Only in this case, setting suggestion performance may be made executable as an operation performance of the suggestion performance mode during a specific period after a predetermined period has elapsed. In these cases as well, it is possible to improve the game's interest by diversifying the presentation so that the player expects the operation presentation in the suggested presentation mode.

In addition, it is only necessary that the degree of advantage of the player in the plurality of types of advantageous states can be varied depending on whether any game value is awarded or not, and the content of the game value that is awarded. For example, when the time-saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the advantage of the player may be varied by varying the upper limit number of variable displays that can be performed in the time-saving state. Alternatively, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the advantage of the player may be varied by varying the jackpot probability in the variable probability state. The degree of advantage for the player may be varied by varying the number of times the game is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, the value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the gaming value related to the execution of the game itself, and includes, for example, the execution of a reach effect that becomes a super reach, the display of an effect image that becomes a premier character, and the value that becomes a premium song. It may include part or all of executing a specific effect, such as playing back audio or displaying an image showing a two-dimensional code. The image indicating the two-dimensional code may include information that enables the player to obtain predetermined digital content by photographing the image with a terminal device (portable terminal) owned by the player. The value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include performance points different from those for executing a specific performance.

The number of executions of the operation performance is not limited to the case of ``5 times execution'', which is 5 times, or the case of ``10 times execution,'' which is 10 times, but can be any number of times that the operation performance can be performed multiple times. It is good if it is configurable. In this case as well, when the number of executions of the operation presentation is large, the setting suggestion presentation may be made executable by setting the number of times of setting suggestions other than 0 at a higher rate than when the number of executions of the operation presentation is small. In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is large, it is possible to determine the number of setting suggestions that would not be determined when the number of executions of the operation effect is small, or the rate at which more setting suggestion effects are executed is increased. You can.

Instead of the determination example shown in FIG. 17-6, a restriction may be set for all of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns so that the setting suggestion performance based on the same setting suggestion pattern is not executed. In addition, regardless of whether it is the final operation performance or whether the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined, the setting suggestion pattern is determined at a common determination ratio, and then a predetermined difference is determined. If the replacement condition is satisfied, the determined setting suggestion pattern may be replaced with another setting suggestion pattern to restrict the setting suggestion effect from being executed using the same setting suggestion pattern. Alternatively, setting suggestion performance using the same setting suggestion pattern may be repeatedly executed for a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.

It may be possible to determine the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 at different rates, not only depending on whether or not it is the final operation performance, but also depending on, for example, the number of setting suggestions. When the number of setting suggestions is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a higher rate than when the number of setting suggestions is small, and the confirmation notification that the setting value is 6 may be more likely to be executed. Alternatively, when the number of setting suggestions is large, it is possible to determine the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 at a lower rate than when the number of setting suggestions is small, and it may be difficult to notify that the setting value is 6. .

After the setting suggestion effect based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed once, a restriction may be set so that the setting suggestion effect based on the same setting suggestion pattern is not executed until a predetermined release condition is satisfied. . For example, during a period in which the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, the release condition is not satisfied, and after the setting suggestion performance based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed once, the same setting suggestion pattern It may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect. When the setting suggestion performance based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed, it is determined that the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and it becomes possible to recognize that the setting value is highly advantageous to the player. , it is possible to increase the rarity of such setting suggestion effects and improve the game's interest.

Instead of the setting suggestion performance, or when an operation performance serving as a preview performance is executed together with the setting suggestion performance, a suggestion regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made. For example, as a plurality of preview performance patterns, there may be a preview performance pattern whose determination ratio differs depending on the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or a preview performance pattern that can be determined only when the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a specific value. It may be provided. More specifically, when the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, it is possible to decide on a preview performance pattern that notifies a message of "66% reliability", and the determination rate of the preview performance pattern is increased. As such, it is only necessary that the determined values in the preview performance pattern determination table be assigned to a plurality of preview performance patterns. By executing an operation performance that is a preview performance and making a suggestion regarding a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the preview performance can be executed as an operation performance in the suggestion performance mode during a predetermined period before a specific period. becomes. In addition to the operation performance that is a preview performance, when an operation performance that is a value notification performance is executed, a suggestion regarding a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be made. By executing an operation performance that is a value notification performance and making a suggestion regarding a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a value notification performance is performed as an operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a predetermined period before a specific period. becomes executable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game's interest so as to draw attention to the operation effects that give advance notices and notifications.

In the operation performance determination process shown in FIG. 17-2, instead of steps 60AKS025 to 60AKS029, the number of setting suggestions may be determined after determining the number of value notifications. In this case, if the number of value notifications is determined to be other than 0, the number of setting suggestions can be determined, and if the number of value notifications is determined to be 0, the number of setting suggestions is not determined, and the setting suggestion performance is performed. may be prevented from being executed. In this way, when the value notification performance notifies the player as to whether or not an advantageous game value will be awarded, it is only necessary that the setting suggestion performance provides a suggestion regarding the setting value.

The setting suggestion performance is not limited to a performance that suggests a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but may be a performance that suggests whether or not a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed, for example. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include setting suggestion patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a setting suggestion effect based on a setting suggestion pattern that is determined at a high rate is executed, so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed. , it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the interest in the game.

At least part of the predetermined period, or part or all of the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, an operation performance that is a preview performance may be performed, while an operation performance that is a value notification performance or a setting suggestion performance may not be performed. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "Jackpot", the value notification performance is performed along with the execution of the jackpot start performance (fanfare performance) and the jackpot mid-performance performance (performance corresponding to the first round and the second round, etc.). It may also be possible to perform an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect or a setting suggestion effect. The operation performances, which are the preview performance, the value notification performance, and the setting suggestion performance, may be executed in any order. A case may be provided in which the setting suggestion performance is executed without executing the value notification performance.

In addition to the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the operation effect may be made executable based on the detection of a tilting operation on the stick controller 31A. When the operation performance using the stick controller 31A is executed, the performance mode is set to be more advantageous to the player at a higher rate than when the operation performance using the push button 31B is executed. good. For example, the setting suggestion performance based on the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is such that the determination ratio of the operation performance using the push button 31B is 0/100, and the determination ratio of the operation performance using the stick controller 31A is 100/100. Determined values in the pattern determination table may be assigned to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.

The configuration for detecting actions by the player is not limited to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, but may be a jog dial that can be rotated, or a dial that can be touched or pressed like a touch panel. It may be possible. Further, a sensor capable of detecting any action not limited to the instruction input action by the player may be used, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. An arbitrary motion may be detected as a predetermined operation by analyzing the result of photographing a subject such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). That is, the configuration for detecting the movement by the player may be any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect the movement of any object.

Various restrictions may be set to any range or limit as long as they do not deviate from the objectives to be achieved, the problems to be solved, or other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any conditions that vary the presence, proportion, and other amounts of processing, control, and execution of actions; Any content that can be changed (for example, whether to stop or reduce, how much to reduce, etc.) is sufficient.

(Explanation regarding problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 60AK)
In a gaming machine such as pachinko gaming machine 1, which can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player are set, for example, from 1 to 6. A setting means such as the CPU 103 that can be set to any setting value such as the value of , for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value change process of FIG. 16-13, and a game control means such as the CPU 103 that can proceed with the game, Based on the detection of the player's movement, the processing of steps 60AKS045, 60AKS051, and 60AKS053 shown in FIG. 17-8, which can execute movement effects such as a preview effect, a value information effect, and a setting suggestion effect, is executed, for example. Execute the process of step 60AKS043 shown in FIG. 17-8, which is capable of executing a notification performance such as a number of times notification performance, which performs notification corresponding to the number of times the movement performance is executed, with a movement performance execution means such as the performance control CPU 120. The execution pattern of the motion performance by the motion performance execution means includes, for example, a variable display that executes the motion performance the number of times indicated by the notification performance within a predetermined period. The first execution pattern is such that the result is not a "jackpot" or the determined result of the number of setting suggestions is 0, and the action performance is executed a number of times less than the number of executions indicated by the notification performance within a predetermined period. , and a second execution pattern in which the motion performance is executed for the remaining number of executions after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination result of the number of setting suggestions is other than 0. As shown in FIG. 17-5, FIG. 17-6, and FIG. 17-9, for example, the motion performance execution means executes a motion performance to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period using a suggestive performance mode that provides a suggestion regarding the settings of the setting means. It is doable. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the interest in the game.

The motion performance execution means is equipped with an advantage notification means such as a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 60AKS049 shown in FIG. If the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in the process of step 60AKS024 shown in 17-2, the process of step 60AKS025 is executed, etc. When notification is performed by the advantage notification means, the predetermined period of time is It may be possible to execute the motion performance in the suggested performance mode during a specific period after the elapse of time. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the presentation so as to draw attention to the action presentation of the suggestive presentation mode, thereby improving the game's interest.

The advantageous states include a first advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable", and a second advantageous state, which is higher in advantage than the first advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "probable variable". For example, as shown in FIG. 17-4, when the advantage notification means notifies the user that the control will be in a second advantageous state, The motion performance of the suggestion performance mode may be executed at a higher rate in the specific period than when the advantage notification means informs that the first advantageous state is controlled. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game's interest so that the player expects the action effects in the suggested effect mode.

The advantageous states include a first advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable", and a second advantageous state, which is higher in advantage than the first advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "probable variable". It is possible to control to multiple types of advantageous states including In the case where the notification that the control will be in the first advantageous state is made by the advantage notification means, the suggestion is made in the specific period at a higher rate than in the case where the advantage notification means is notified that the control will be in the second advantageous state. It may also be possible to perform a motion performance in a performance mode. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game's interest so that the player expects the action effects in the suggested effect mode.

As the advantageous state, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, the type of jackpot is either "non-probable variable" or "probable variable," and the operation performance execution means is For example, as shown in FIG. 17-4, only when the advantage notification means informs that the control will be controlled to the advantageous state with the highest degree of advantage, it is possible to perform the action production of the suggestion production mode in a specific period. You can. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game's interest so that the player can expect the action effects in the suggested effect mode.

The motion performance execution means executes a motion performance according to one of the plurality of modes as a motion performance of the suggested mode, for example, when the set number of suggestions shown in FIG. 17-4 is determined to be one of 2 to 4. , can be executed multiple times in a specific period after a predetermined period has elapsed, and restricts the action rendering of the suggested rendering mode from being executed in the same manner included in the plurality of modes, for example, step 60AKS027 shown in FIG. 17-2. A restriction means such as an effect control CPU 120 which determines the setting suggestion pattern at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 17-6 in the process may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the interest in the game.

During a specific period after a predetermined period has elapsed, the motion performance execution means performs a motion performance of the suggestion performance mode at a first timing, such as the execution timing of the first suggestion, and at a timing later than the first timing, for example, a second suggestion. It is possible to execute the action at a second timing such as the execution timing of the action, and as shown in FIGS. 17-4 and 17-6, the action effect suggests that the setting value is the most advantageous for the player. may be able to be executed at a higher rate at the second timing than at the first timing. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the presentation so as to draw attention to the movement presentation of the suggestive presentation mode, thereby improving the game's interest.

The motion performance execution means may be capable of executing a motion performance that foretells that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state during a predetermined period in a suggestive performance mode. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the effects so as to attract attention to the action effects for which the preview is given, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 18-1 shows an example of the configuration of various circuits mounted on the production control board 12 regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 18-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a production data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the performance control command received from the main board 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, and other decorations. It is sufficient if it is an integrated processor in which a circuit that can control execution of a performance using some or all of a plurality of performance devices such as LEDs for use in production, movable members for performance such as the movable body 32, etc., is integrated into one chip. . The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while some or all of the audio processing circuit 91AK133, lamp control circuit 91AK134, and motor control circuit 91AK135 are included in the production control microprocessor. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in response to a request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The performance data memory 91AK123 stores in advance performance data that can be used to execute a performance using the performance device, such as various image data representing display images on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 only needs to include moving image data and still image data. As still image data, for example, character image data that is sprite image data that is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, is used. It's fine if it's prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, image data of arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, effect images showing people, figures, symbols, etc., and background images are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. All you have to do is stay there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that allows characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of motor drive data used for rotationally driving a drive motor that operates a movable member such as the movable body 32. The performance data memory 91AK123 may be any nonvolatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal use state where the progress of the performance is controlled, the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

The ROM91AK124 stores computer programs and fixed data for effect control. The RAM91AK125 provides a work area for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the settings of the built-in register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, a timeout signal is generated as a time elapsed signal. generate a signal. The timeout signal is input to the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. Upon generation of the timeout signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the production control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM91AK124 stores various table data used to control performance operations in addition to programs for performance control. For example, the ROM91AK124 contains table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables and decision tables prepared for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, and table data constituting various production control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The performance control pattern includes, for example, performance control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the performance control process timer judgment value, an end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the production control pattern and production control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of commands in which a series of transfer commands and the like to be executed by the VDP91AK132 are written in accordance with the order of image processing. The display list may include a mixture of display control commands, audio control commands, lamp control commands, and motor control commands. By controlling the progress of the performance using such a display list, it is sufficient to be able to control the electric components for the performance in a coordinated manner. The RAM91AK125 stores programs and various data used to control the electric components for presentation. The CPU 91AK131 only needs to be able to read the programs and data stored in the RAM 91AK125 in a shorter reading time than the reading time of the programs and data stored in the ROM 91AK124.

The CPU91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU91AK131 executes a performance control process for controlling the progress of the performance using the electric components for the performance according to the program read from the ROM91AK124. The effect control processing includes, for example, fixed data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK124, variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores it, and CPU91AK131 performs various types of data temporarily stored in the RAM91AK125. Variation data read processing for reading variation data of Good too.

The VDP91AK132 determines the content of control of image display in the image display device 5 based on display control commands and register settings from the CPU91AK131. For example, the VDP91AK132 controls the variable display of decorative patterns and various types of effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor that has image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. Note that the VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor more generally referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction part (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing etc. according to the decoding result. For example, a group of instructions for display control included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The voice control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The lamp control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The motor control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and outputs the separated data into video data and audio data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data and text image data from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like, decompress and decode the data, and then supply the data to the character image renderer 91AK145 and the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing that can adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the video data, or some or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted video data in the VRAM 91AK147. You can. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the vector format character image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 performs image conversion processing to display the character image specified by the character image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert vector format text image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 performs image conversion processing to display the text image specified by the text image specification information in the display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP91AK132. The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with various areas such as a palette area where palette data is placed, a character buffer where character image data is stored, a text buffer where text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. It is used for preservation. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (gradation control signal) according to the display data created in the VDP91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM91AK147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM91AK147, such as the built-in memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data) created by the VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, polygons, etc. data), etc. Note that the frame buffer includes, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a real display area that stores display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may also be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen of the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 in the virtual display area of the frame buffer is created, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. In this way, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores display data of each effect image created by drawing processing. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank occurs. The V blank is generated at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may also be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area every time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and an image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, display data created by drawing processing is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R, based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Furthermore, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of storing audio data not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the performance data memory 91AK123, ROM91AK124, etc., for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding the audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light emission modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP91AK132, and outputs it to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 132, and outputs it to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built into the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, and is capable of storing various data used to control the progress of the performance.

FIG. 18-2 shows an example of the configuration of the storage area for effect control depending on the storage contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided, for example, so as to be included in the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores performance control programs and performance control management data, and functions as a management area for performance control programs and the like. For example, table data that is the configuration data of various tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data that configures the performance control pattern, etc. are stored in the storage area as management data. It is sufficient if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table that defines procedures for displaying production images, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. All you have to do is stay there. The image processing program may include a program that converts vector format image data to bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program that generates a bitmap text image based on text written using character codes and font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and its related data. For video data, compressed image information including reference images, predicted images, etc. is generated by compression encoding processing such as motion compensated predictive encoding using multiple frames of original images, and is multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files that constitute a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table performs a display control process that allows the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed in correspondence with the moving image data. The display mode of a moving image is a mode or form when a moving image is played back and displayed, including a display style and a display layout of the moving image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be still image data in which arbitrary character images representing a plurality of types of decorative designs, people, figures, symbols, etc. are described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files that constitute a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image related data including text image data and its related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates connecting the outline for each character used to display a text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line or curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. Text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of multiple character images, and includes arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient as long as it indicates the unit of the unit in a recognizable manner. Furthermore, the text image data may represent a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using text image data may indicate subtitles, subtitles, or other information-conveying characters. It may also indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP91AK132 executes an image processing program, so it may be stored in either the ROM91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. In this way, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the text image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. Note that table data and data files that constitute the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores audio-related data including audio data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the audio that is played back and output in synchronization with the image in the performance using a moving image display, and can be played back and output as any audio as the performance progresses in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is fine as long as it is done. The audio-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table. The audio output process table is used for audio control processing that can change the sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Note that table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as production control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the video renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 18-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and text display process table according to the content of the reach effect. In the super reach reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to perform an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect by displaying the moving image is performed and the period in which the effect by displaying the text image is performed may be partly or completely the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image that is a combination of a plurality of character images.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 18-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined depending on the content of the reach effect, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined. be done. Among these, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the reach effect. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, there are cases where the text display process table can be determined in common even for different reach effect contents, and cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

Text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", it is impossible to decide. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", the decision cannot be made. In this way, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of text images when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD11. Can be displayed. If the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (Jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD02 is executed, and if the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Can be displayed. Therefore, a text image using a common text display process table can be added to and displayed on a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 18-4 shows an example of the structure of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 18-4 (A1) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in response to the SP reach A reach effect, and FIG. 18-4 (A2) shows the SP reach A reach effect. A configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in accordance with the production is shown. FIG. 18-4(B) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include text image designation information and text display setting information that are set in association with each other in a single text display period. The text display period specifies, for each text image to be displayed, a start time to start displaying the text image and an end time to end the display. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image in the reach effect has started, or may be specified using the elapsed time since the variable display has started. You can. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the video image, the start and end times of the text display period are determined using the elapsed time since the video image display started. It is desirable to specify. The elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display changed to the reach mode, so even if the video image is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display changed to the reach mode, The timing at which the display starts may vary. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image started, the timing at which a specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be improved. The text image designation information specifies text image data used for displaying a text image in a specifiable manner. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that designates the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information can be used to specify the content of the text image to be displayed using any character code, such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), or JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). may be information that specifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies the display mode of the text image in a configurable manner based on display style information, display layout information, other metadata, etc. of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be written using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table only needs to be able to set text image designation information and text display setting information in association with each other in a text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 18-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 18-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 18-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 18-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T10. Display of a moving image starts at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 18-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 18-5 (A1), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image. Note that timing T08 is a timing that arrives after timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 18-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 18-5 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Furthermore, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. Display. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image specification information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a period that is partially or entirely common to a second text display period that is different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. 3 text display periods are included. In this case, the first text display period has a part in common with the second text display period, and a part in common with the third text display period. In this way, the first text display period includes a period that is partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period that is partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is common to the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is common to the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. In this way, a part of the first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and a part of the second text display period may be included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the entire first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and the entire second text display period may be included in the first text display period.

Depending on the settings in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image specification information can be displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. As a second text display period included in the first text display period, a text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, text image designation information 91AKA03 or text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is applied to the display of the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification information is used to display the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image specified by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image specified by text image specification information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is changed so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 from timing T02 to timing T03. The text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least part of the plurality of text display periods, so that the display of the text images can be improved. Components can be changed. In addition, when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, it is possible to change the display mode of the text image in all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. good. When video images using common video data are displayed, some or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You can also let In this way, it may be possible to change part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image, or it is possible to change part or all of the text image added to one moving image. You can also use it as

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 18-4(B), as shown in FIG. 18-5(B), in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 Displays the specified text image. Also, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA23 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. Displays the specified text image.

FIG. 18-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields, such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field allows setting of the font family, which is the font type, for the font of characters included in the text image. The fontSize field allows setting the font size at which the text image will be displayed. The fontWeight field allows setting the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field allows setting the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field allows setting the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of the characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters included in a text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorative displays added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information allows the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to be set.

FIG. 18-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 18-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 18-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 18-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image specification information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, due to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As a second text display period included in this first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, a third text display period included in the first text display period is specified by text image specification information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. It may be displayed in different display layouts. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It can be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in a text display setting different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The information 91 may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by AKB13. In this way, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. In addition to displaying the text image in one display mode, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. In the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. At the same time, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is first displayed. The text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of text images added to a moving image, some text images can be displayed in a different display mode from other text images. Furthermore, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, there are cases in which the text image in the second display mode is changed to a text image in the third display mode and then displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, as in the case where the text image of the mode is changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 18-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 18-4 (A2), the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. The text image specified by the specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Further, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Display. Also, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. In this case, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. Further, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Furthermore, in the plurality of text display process tables, at least some of the text image specification information and text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , some or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and second component regarding the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 18-6(A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF using the color field. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 18-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 18-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 18-4(B), a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is a second component regarding the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed depending on the elapsed time. Note that, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable depending on the reach effect content etc. even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, for example, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at different rates depending on whether the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" or not is controlled to be in an advantageous state. may be determined, or may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Furthermore, even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information, the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, can be changed depending on the execution result of the production control program by the CPU91AK131. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 only needs to be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on display control commands from the CPU91AK131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of text images can be changed by simply changing some of the data related to text images included in the text display process table, thereby preventing increases in data volume and processing load. , it becomes possible to display a variety of text images. When changing the display color of a text image, other display styles may also be correspondingly changeable. For example, if the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image will be easier for the player to visually recognize, and if the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image will be difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image that is displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if you could change it like this. This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's discomfort when displaying the text image.

FIG. 18-7 shows an example of performing an effect in which a text image is displayed using a text display process table. In this execution example, text images are displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods along with the moving image display when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. In the reach effect of SP Reach A, a moving image is displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", and a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "loss". A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, an effect display that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete is performed, and for example, the battle result is displayed. It is sufficient that the contents of the effect display be the same until the timing of notification. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 becomes high, and when the display result of the variable display is a "loss", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01. becomes higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP Reach A, even in the video display period which is the common effect display content, the jackpot expectation level can be varied depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. I can do it.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 18-7(A) is the effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and the text image designation information 91AKA01 corresponds to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 has the origin coordinates (300,30), for example, as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The font family is AA_gothic, which is a Gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, the text image display color changes gradually from #FF0040 to #4000FF, The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes image conversion processing to display the text image in the display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information. good.

In addition, in the production execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 18-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is changed to It is displayed in the display mode set by . In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 has the origin coordinates (250,600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponds to normal character thickness, the text image display color is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is left justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The production execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 18-7 (B1) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal Components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding regular font, character arrangement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decorations as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, text styles, and text alignment have changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

The production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 18-7 (B2) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and is executed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the text image display color is gold, corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is effect_gold, which is the effect display setting for gold display. Compared to the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Text style, text placement, and text decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by text image specification information, among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, data to be changed and data not to be changed can be individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this manner, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if you want to change and display one data among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, the first data and Other data associated in advance may also be changed and displayed. For example, when changing the display color of a text image to gold corresponding to "gold" and displaying it, it is only necessary to change the text decoration to the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold.

The display color and background display color of the text image are for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, when the brightness (gradation) is between "0" and "255". The level can be set in 256 steps. In text display setting information, the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field has a common data format with the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field, for example, in character display setting information used to display character images. All you have to do is stay there. Further, the coordinates of the origin when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a common data format with the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information can be shared with field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is only necessary that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using information common to a production image different from the text image. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

Font families that can be set when displaying text images are not set when displaying character images. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data that is not included in the character display setting information. Furthermore, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontSize field corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may be different from the field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in a production image different from the text image. Good too. Thereby, a variety of text images can be displayed by flexibly changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

For example, if a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the text decoration becomes the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold. In the text display setting information, if "gold" is set in the color field, effect_gold is set in the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and to display gold around the text image. It is possible to add and display a special effect image. In the production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 18-7 (B2), when the text image specification information 91A13 specifies a specific text image indicating the line "Super hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 specifies a gold display. By setting the display style, etc., a specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for golden display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an effect is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data, by adding an effect using a text image display using text image data, it is easier for the player to recognize the content of the effect. This makes it easier to provide information that is different from the content of the performance. In this case, if the data structure is such that text image data is compressed and encoded and multiplexed as video data included in the video data, the outline of the text image will be Problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. Additionally, if different video data is prepared depending on the display content of the text image display added to the video display, the data capacity of the video data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It becomes easier. If special compression encoding processing or decompression decoding processing is performed in order to prevent deterioration of display quality in text image display, there is a risk that the processing load of image data will further increase.

In the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK, when an effect using a moving image display using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, an effect using a text image display using the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, it becomes possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the contents of the performance. Additionally, since text image display effects are added using text image data that is stored separately from the video image data, it is possible to avoid an increase in the data capacity of the video data or an increase in the processing load of the image data. , it becomes possible to appropriately control the display so as to prevent it as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information, as a first component regarding the text image, designates the display content of the text image according to the text image data. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to perform image conversion processing, etc. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one video image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first and second components related to the text image added to the first video image, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and data capacity and processing burden can be reduced. Appropriate display control becomes possible so that the increase is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. If the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In addition, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is displayed. It is possible to add and display the used text image. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In this way, a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, can be added to and displayed on a plurality of mutually different moving images. By making it possible to add and display text images using common data to multiple video images, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and increases in data volume and processing load are prevented. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the line "Very hot" are displayed based on the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style and the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . A text image showing the line "Super hot" is a text image that corresponds to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of becoming a "jackpot". It only needs to be a text image. In this way, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component, such as the display mode regarding the specific text image, may be changeable at multiple timings.

FIG. 18-8 shows an example of display control in a case where the display style of a text image indicating the line "Super hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and no text decoration is set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042 is During the display period, the display color is gold and no text decoration is set, and during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the effect display setting is such that the text decoration is gold. Note that the text image display style common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 is a font whose font family is DD_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font by the fontFamily field, and a font size of 72px by the fontSize field, respectively. It is set.

FIG. 18-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black, which corresponds to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting, which corresponds to none. As a result, the display aspect including the display style is controlled so that the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is displayed in black and has no text decoration.

FIG. 18-8(B) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and no text decoration is set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed, for example, by displaying a gradation of the text image. However, if the text image display is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 18-8(C) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to effect display settings for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the text decoration is set to a gold effect display setting. In addition to setting the display color of a text image to gold, if you set the character decoration of the text image to an effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the outline of the text image Effect images can be added and displayed around text images using display colors such as shading and shading, border display using bevels and embossing, layer styles that add glow, and combinations of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to giving the text image a glossy appearance, by adding and displaying an effect image around the text image, it becomes easier for players to recognize the golden display, and the game It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, one part of the text image is distinguished from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in different display styles. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image with the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image called "Character" out of the text information indicating the line "If this character wins..." to display the display color and background of the text image differently from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and font style.

FIG. 18-9 shows a display example in which a portion of a text image has a display style different from that of other portions. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed with a white display color, a black background display color, and an italic text style, and the other part of the text image is displayed with a black display color. Display the background display color as white and the text style as normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image called "Character", and the color field sets the display color of the text image to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, the backgroundColor field sets the background display color to black corresponding to #000000, Set the italics corresponding to the italic character style using the fontStyle field. In addition, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to other parts of the text image, with the color field setting the text image display color to black corresponding to #000000, the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field setting the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF. Set the normal font corresponding to the character style normal. Thereby, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of other portions, it is possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

In displaying a text image constituting a character string that is a combination of a plurality of character images, a portion that is displayed in a display style different from other portions may be changeable in accordance with the progress of the presentation by displaying the moving image. For example, when the performance of a song or the audio playback of dialogue progresses as a video image is displayed, a part of the text image that corresponds to the progress status is displayed in a display style that is different from other parts, such as display in a specific color or highlight display. You may let them. The display style may be changeable so that a portion of the text image is displayed as fade-in or fade-out in accordance with the progress of the performance of the music or the audio reproduction of the lines. This is not limited to the situation in which a song is played along with a video image or the audio of a line is being played, but a part of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other parts can be changed depending on the elapsed time in the execution of a given performance. It may be possible. Thereby, in displaying the text image, a portion displayed in a display style different from other portions is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, thereby making it possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but it is possible to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also include a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of a text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Execute either one of the following: display control that allows changes to be made depending on the content of the video, or display control that allows text images to be added and displayed using common text image data for multiple video images. It may also be possible to do one without executing the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be arbitrary components that can be changed, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. In place of or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, it is possible to change any component related to the display of the text image. You can. For example, when moving and displaying a text image, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying enlarged or reduced text images, and the enlargement and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time. Any configuration element that can be set regarding the display of a text image may be changed as long as it is possible to change any component that can be set regarding the display of a text image, such as the time interval or amount of change for updating the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio when changing the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio.

When displaying a text image corresponding to common display content, the display mode of the text image can be changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in Figure 18-6(A). The present invention is not limited to changing the display color, but may be any display mode that can be changed such as an arbitrary display style or display layout. For example, a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 has origin coordinates, font family, Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. A text image in a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be able to change a display mode different from the text image in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to being stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least some text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive and cursive, is multiplexed and compression encoded as part of the video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display a text image in a specific manner by decoding it or the like. In this case, data regarding a text image in a specific manner is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the data related to text images includes specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. It's okay.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may also be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 using text image specification information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not require field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings, such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize, for example.

The scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only with data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or with, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to text images, such as word font data, which is not limited to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be prepared. If only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, an increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images, not limited to those used in display effects, is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused, so it is easier to design effects for displaying text images. The burden can be reduced, and when a large amount of text images are used in display effects, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

As a second component related to a text image, a specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings is not limited to a text image showing the line "Super hot". , any text image that is preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group may be used. For example, among the plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of a song or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as the specific text image. In this way, for a specific text image that corresponds to an audio production or a display production whose content changes depending on the elapsed time, such as the playback output of a song or the playback display of a moving image, the second component such as the display mode can be set in multiple ways. It may be possible to change the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display where the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display where the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to a text image of display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of being a "jackpot", but a text image of display content that suggests that the probability of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to a jackpot gaming state, but may include special gaming states such as a time saving state and a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit of the number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") which is greater than the second round number (for example, "7"), and that it can be performed in the time-saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (e.g., "100") that is higher than the second number (e.g., "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is higher than the second probability (e.g., 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times the jackpot gaming state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chances (for example, "5"). It may also include a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10") resulting in a more advantageous gaming situation for the player.

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold, which corresponds to "gold"; for example, it may be silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any other color different from metallic colors. This may include a case where the display color is set. The present invention is not limited to the display color of the text image, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings should be made using the textDecoration field in the text display setting information so that an effect image can be added and displayed around the text image. Bye.

When displaying a text image as a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as intra-character coordinates or display time when displaying the text image. For example, if the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the display color can be changed to a different display color for each character coordinate of the text image. , it would be good if rainbow display were possible. For example, for the coordinates in the character 1, depending on the elapsed time, the display color changes from red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then from bluish-purple to reddish-purple. You can change multiple display colors one after another. At this time, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted and each The display color of the coordinates within the text may be changed in the following order: red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, blue-violet, and red-violet. After red-purple, you can change the display color by returning to red again. This allows the player to smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" using the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image. Note that by sequentially changing different display colors according to the intra-character coordinates of the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow manner. Alternatively, by sequentially changing a common display color for all intra-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this way, a text image may be displayed in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether or not a specific movement of the player is detected, or multiple components may be changed at different rates. It may be possible to change either one. The player's specific actions that allow the first component and the second component regarding the text image to be changed include, for example, a push or pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, and other operations on the V stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary action of tilting the rod, or it may be an action of pressing down the push button 31b. The player's movements are not limited to those that can be detected, but are based on the detection results of any changes or differences in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control on the detection target, or changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target. In addition, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable. Detection devices capable of detecting movements, changes, differences, etc. in a detection target, such as infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, CCD sensors, and CMOS sensors, can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, electromagnetically, Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of a mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

A part or all of the effect by displaying a text image using text image data may be executed as a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to these determination ratio settings, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the rate at which the effect by text image display according to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. is made different depending on the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is easy to perform an effect by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the setting value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is easily executed. The ratio of performance based on image display increases. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" and the effect by text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous to the player. The expectation level, which is a set value, increases.

In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set such that in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in a range where the setting value is the specific setting value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is a specific setting value, but is not executed when the setting value is other than the specific setting value. In this way, within a range where the setting value is a specific setting value, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, when it is a special period, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than when it is a period other than the special period. In this case, a limit is set in which the execution rate of setting suggestion effects is lower in a range that is a period other than the special period than in a range that is a special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate during a special period, but is not executed during a period other than the special period. In this way, within the special period, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed within a period other than the special period.

The present invention is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is met, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not met. In this case, a limit is set in which the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance is lower in a range where the special condition is not met than in a range where the special condition is met. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that becomes executable at a predetermined rate when a special condition is met, but is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion performance is not executed in a range where the special condition is not satisfied. The special condition may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of the judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance or the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be any condition that can be established depending on the judgment or decision. Not limited to setting suggestion effects, any effect may be one that can be executed at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met or not. The production mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are met, or the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. . In addition, a restriction may be set for an arbitrary performance such that a specific performance is not executed within a range where a preset restriction condition is met, or compared to a range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. A limit may be set such that the execution rate decreases and it is difficult to execute.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 91AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a specific performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the area and the data stored in the first storage area, and a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. and a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling the display of a text image, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first configuration such as a text image specified by text image specification information. The character image control means includes data regarding a plurality of character image components including a second component such as an element and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information, and the character image control means During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 18-7. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 18-8, the character image control means is capable of changing the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. Good too. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component regarding the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 18-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot," for example, as shown in FIG. 18-8. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 18-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 18-8. It may also be possible to add an effect image to the surrounding area and display it. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 92AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a specific performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the area and the data stored in the first storage area, and a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. and a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling the display of a text image, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first configuration such as a text image specified by text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD11. It is possible to add and display character images using data related to common character images. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 18-8, the character image control means controls the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. The second component may be changeable. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component regarding the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 18-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot," for example, as shown in FIG. 18-8. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 18-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 18-8. It may also be possible to add an effect image to the surrounding area and display it. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK may be combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic part 60AK as appropriate. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect in a suggestion effect mode, and in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, or a character image using data regarding a common character image may be created for the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. It may be possible to add and display it.

1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Game machine frame 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9...Frame LED
10...General winning opening 11...Main board 12...Production control board 13...Audio control board 14...LED control board 15...Relay board 17...Special variable winning ball device 20...Normal symbol display 21...Gate switch 22A, 22B...Start Mouth switch 23...First count switch 24...Second count switch 30...Ball operating handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 41...Passing gate 100...Microcomputer for game control 101, 121...ROM
102, 122...RAM
103...CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit 91AK100... Microprocessor for production control 91AK131... CPU
91AK132…VDP
91AK143...Video decoder 91AK144...Moving image renderer 91AK146...Text image renderer 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14...Storage area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing games,
a production execution means capable of executing a specific production of displaying a moving image with a text image added;
a first storage area that stores data related to moving images;
a second storage area that stores data related to character images;
a third storage area that stores data regarding a character image different from the character image;
moving image control means for controlling display of moving images using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using data in the second storage area;
character image control means for controlling display of a character image using data in the third storage area ;
The data in the second storage area includes data regarding a plurality of character image constituent elements including text information data and text display setting information data ,
The data in the third storage area includes data regarding a plurality of character image constituent elements including character information data and character display setting information data,
The character image control means is capable of changing the text information data and the text display setting information data during a display period of a character image added to one moving image,
The performance execution means executes, as the specific performance, a first specific performance corresponding to a case where the player is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and a second specific performance corresponding to a case where the player is not controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible and
The moving image control means is capable of controlling the display of the moving image using different data in the first storage area for the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
There is a character image data table constituted by data regarding a plurality of character image constituent elements in the second storage area,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the first specific effect includes a first character image data table and a second character image data table different from the first character image data table. ,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the second specific effect includes the first character image data table and the second character image data table,
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher when a character image is displayed using the second character image data table than when a character image is displayed using the first character image data table. is high,
There is a character image data table configured of data regarding a plurality of character image constituent elements in the third storage area,
The text information data includes first text information data, second text information data, and third text information data,
The text display setting information data includes first text display setting information data, second text display setting information data, and third text display setting information data,
The first character image data table includes first data for displaying a character image using the first text information data and the first text display setting information data , and the second text information data and the second text display. and second data for displaying a character image using the setting information data ,
The second character image data table is configured to include the first data and third data for displaying a character image using the third text information data and the third text display setting information data ,
The character image data table is configured to include character data for displaying a character image using the character information data and the character display setting information data,
The first text display setting information data, the second text display setting information data, and the third text display setting information data each include text display color data regarding a display color, text display position data regarding a display position, including;
The character display setting information data includes character display color data regarding display colors and character display position data regarding display positions,
The text display color data and the character display color data have a common data format,
The text display position data and the character display position data have a common data format;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images